可圈可点网,永久免费组卷,永久免费下载
试卷 教案 课件 搜索
试题搜索答案

九年级英语上册同步学案练习-全套(20套)人教版新目标预览

来源:cooco.net.cn 作者:佚名 下载前先 预览1
下载地址
☉禁止使用迅雷下载本站资源,如果不能下载请联系QQ:513391243
☉如果遇到什么问题,可以加网站QQ群(280105675)
☉本站提供的资源仅供学习研究之用,任何涉及商业盈利目的均不得使用。
下载内容预览: 预览不包含图片,只是文字内容 ,需要完整资源请下载.
Readings of Unit 1-2
学习目标:
1. 扩展知识面,提高阅读、分析能力
2. 扩大单词量,学会一些词组的用法

Reading of Unit 1 : Old phone , true friend. (旧手机,真朋友)

一. Key words and phrases (重点词汇)
1. mobile adj 可移动的
2. ashamed adj 惭愧的、害臊的
3. old - fashioned adj. 过时的、老式的
4. outdated adj 过时的
5. fashionable adj 时髦的、时尚的
6. actually adv. 实际上
7. latest adj 最新的,最近的
8. embarrassed adj 尴尬的
9. main adj 主要的

1. on one's way to 在去...的路上
2. be ashamed of 由于...感到害臊
3. behind the times 过时的
4. at the time 当时
5. send fast messages / short messages 发短信
6. worst of all 最糟糕的是
7. make sb do sth 使某人做某事(如make people laugh)
8. status symbol 身份的象征
9. if ... or not 是否
10. spend ...on sth 在...上花费(金钱或时间)
11. be with sb 与某人在一起
12. fit in with sb 与...相处融洽

二. Questions before reading. (热身练习)
在我们阅读文章之前,课本中提出了几个问题,我们要唤起自己的背景知识,回答这些问题,这样也可
以帮助我们对文章更好的理解。To answer these questions , we should use our background knowledge .
Also , it can help us get a better understanding of the text.
For example , "How long has that model been around ? "
be around 意思是"在某领域或行业中,活跃而突出"。因此,这句话我们可以译成"这一款手机已经
流行(或面市)了多久?"
You can answer like that "It has been around for about half a year. "
又如"What special things can it do ? "他有什么特别的用途?
现在的手机用途可谓多种多样,无所不能,所以也可以这样回答。
It can sing the songs , play cool tunes , send fast messages , surf the Internet , take
photos , use as a recorder , and so on.
认真完成这些热身练习,可以帮助我们开动脑筋,为学习下面的文章做好充分的头脑、思维上的准备,
提高学习效果。所以我们不应忽视。

三. Summarizing each paragraph. (总结每段的大意)
快速阅读文章,总结每段的大意,能够帮助我们的分析理解能力和归纳能力。正确的用自己的语言来概
括每段的主要内容,一方面能够帮助我们看清楚文章的结构和脉络,另一方面也可以锻炼我们使用语言的能
力。这两方面都对我们提高写作能力有积极的作用。
请同学们写出每段的大意,只须每段一句话。
参考答案:
Paragraph 1 : What phone you have says a lot about you.
Paragraph 2 : I didn't use my phone much , except sending fast messages.
Paragraph 3 : My phone is outdated now.
Paragraph 4 : I don't need a new one.
Paragraph 5 : The real reason is that I like my old phone.

四. Key points of reading material. (重点分析)
1. While we were on our way to the restaurant , my mobile phone rang.
当我们去饭店的路上的时候,我的手机响了。
while引导了一个时间状语从句。while后面一般加一个时间段,既该动作或状态必须应持续一段时间。
如we were on our way to the restaurant , "我们去饭店的路上"这一状况不可能瞬间发生就结束的,
而一定会持续一段时间,因此,可用while 引导。另外,while也可引导进行时态的句子。如:
Somebody knocked at the door while we were having supper.
当我们正在吃晚饭的时候,有人敲门。

2. What phone you have says a lot about you to some people these days.
现在,你拥有什么样的手机会向别人透露许多你的信息。
句中What phone you have 是主语从句,意思是你拥有什么样的手机
又如:What you said made me terrified.
你说的话使我感到恐惧。

3.
times : 指时代、时势、境况,the times 指当代
eg. What wonderful times we live in ! 我们生活在多么了不起的时代啊!
in ancient times 在古代 hard times 艰难时世

4. I was glad to be like my friends who all had mobile phones.
我非常高兴能像我那些有手机的朋友们一样。
like 介词,像...一样 用于系动词后面 如be like.
又如look like 看起来像
The story sounds like a beautiful song.
这个故事听起来像一首优美的歌曲。
Who all had mobile phones 是定语从句,修饰先行词my friends.
意思是"我的那些有手机的朋友们。"

5. I often think my old phone will make people laugh.
我经常认为我的老手机会惹人笑话。
make people laugh 使人发笑
make 是使役动词,我们经常用make sb do sth . 使某人做某事
请注意make 后面直接加动词原形,而不能加不定式to .
又如:If you have the latest model , it can make you look good in front of your friends.
如果你有最新款的手机,它可以使你在朋友面前很有面子。
"make you look good"使你看起来很有面子。
类似的使役动词还有have , let 。
eg. The teacher had some students stay in the classroom after school.
放学后老师让一些学生仍留在教室里。
If you have a new idea , please let me know.
如果你有了新主意,请让我知道。

6. Why do I spend money on a new model when I won't use everything it has and I wouldn't
even know how to anyway ?
当我不可能使用新手机的每一项功能,甚至我也不知道怎么(使用)的时候,我为什么要花钱买个新手
机呢?
这是一句含有否定意义的疑问句,意在表达"我不想买新手机"。when 引导了两个并列的时间状语从
句,中间用and连接。

7. Giving it up would be like saying goodbye to an old friend just because he or she doesn'
t fit in with my new , fashionable friends.
放弃(我的旧手机)就象是跟我的老朋友说再见,仅仅是因为他或她和我的新朋友,时髦的朋友不相衬
了一样。
在这一句中, giving it up 是动名词短语做主语。
fit in (with sb)意思是与...相处融洽,与...相配
本句比较复杂,要求能读懂大意即可。

五. Culture Note (文化背景)
For many people , having a mobile phone is a status symbol . They like to show others that
they have one and use it often . But mobile phones can be very annoying for other people in
many situations . When you are with someone else in a social or business context , you should
not answer the phone unless you are expecting an important call . Otherwise , you are saying
that the person you are with is not as important as other people.
对于许多人来讲,拥有手机是身份的象征。他们乐于在人前,展示并经常使用它。但有一些场合,手机
会使其他人感到心烦。当你在公众场合或商业场合中,与其他人在一起时,不应该接电话,除非你是在等一
个重要的电话。否则,你的举动就等于表示和你在一起的那个人并没有其他人那样重要。造成不好的影响。
对于中学生而言,也容易引起攀比,虚荣的风气。有手机有利有弊。
Reading of Unit 2 : E-mail English (E-mail英语)
一. Key words and phrases (重点词汇)
1. save v. 节省 节约
2. chat line n. 热线交谈服务
3. mostly adv. 几乎全部地,主要地
4. acronym n. 首字母缩拼词,首字母组合词
5. homophone n. 同音异义词
6. emotive n. 表情符号
7. mark n. 符号,记号
8. indicate v. 标示,指示
9. expression n. 表情,表达,措辞
10. comprehend v. 理解、领会
11. describe v. 描绘、描述
Phrases :
1. be made up of 由...组成
2. sound like 听起来像
3. take sb ...to do sth 花费某人(多长时间)去做某事
4. can't stop doing sth 禁不住做某事
5. instead of 代替,而不是...
6. make faces 做鬼脸
7. consist of 由...组成,由...构成
8. come from 来自于...出自于...
9. stand for 代表 代替
10. face to face 面对面
11. such as 例如

二. Warming - up (热身练习)
E-mail English ,这篇文章相当富有时代感,因为e-mail英语是近年来随着因特网的飞速传播而迅速
发展起来的新兴变化。事实上就是使用首字母组合词,或同音异义词及一些象形符号等使得语言的键盘输入
更加迅速,看起来,有时会一头雾水,读起来,渐渐体会个中滋味。请看下面的例子:
BTW by the way
F2F →Face to face
OIC→Oh , I see !
CU→See you .
How Ru→How are you !
GR 8 →Great !
试着翻译下面这两个句子:(请译成正常的规范的英文)
1. Hi , how RU ? Let's meet 4 dinner and then C a movie 2night .
2. Good idea . BTW , I'm at school until 5 : 30 Cu ! :-)
译文:
1. Hi , how are you ? Let's meet for dinner and then see a movie tonight.
2. Good idea , By the way . I'm at school until 5:30 . See you ! (Happy face)
有些人喜欢在网上使用它,因为它能使沟通更加迅速;有的人则非常反对,因为它看起来怪里怪气,不
熟悉的人根本看不明白。做为教师们来说,多数老师都认为学生应该掌握规范的英语才好,但是我们不妨了
解e-mail English 的一些简单规律,也做为我们增长见识的一个方面。

三. Main ideas of each paragraph. (段落大意)
Paragraph 1 : Where e-mail English comes from.
Paragraph 2 : How new e-mail words are made.
Paragraph 3 : E-mail words that save space.
Paragraph 4 : Using sounds in new e-mail words.
Paragraph 5 : Using faces in e-mail English
3. Paragraph 6 : Teachers and e-mail English .

四. Key Points (重点分析)
1. E-mail English is a new kind of English that many people use to save time . E-mail 英语是
一种新兴的,许多人用来节省时间的英语。
that many people use to save time 是定语从句,用来修饰先行词,new kind of English .
注意use to 和used to 的区别
二者后面都加动词原形,但意义大不相同。

save time 节省时间 save space 节省空间
save money 则是攒钱的意思

2. The first kind is made up of the first letters of other words. These are called acronyms.
第一种是由单词的首字母组合而成,被称为首字母组合词。在这两个句子中,is made up of , are
called 都涉及到了一个重要的语法现象,被动语态结构:"be +动词的过去分词"
在英语中,有主动和被动两种语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者,被动语态表示主语是动作的承
受者。
如:
试对比:
He wrote the letter . 他写了信(写信的动作是由主语他发出的)为主动语态。
The letter was written by him. 那封信是他写的。
(主语"信"是动作的承受者,是被动语态。)
eg. 1. These are called acronyms. 这些被称做首字母组合词。
eg2. His bike has been stolen. 他的自行车被人偷走了。
关于被动语态的详细内容将在第三单元讲解。

3. mostly adv. 大多数地,大部分,主要地(= almost all , generally 几乎全部、大多)
eg. I spend my free time mostly watching TV . 我闲暇时大多在看电视。
eg. There are only 7 girls in our PE class , so the class is mostly boys.
在我们体育班仅有7个女孩,因此这个班大多数是男生。

4. Other acronyms are F2F which stands for face to face , CSL for can't stop laughing and
... , 其他的首字母缩写词有F2F 代表face to face. CSL代表can't stop laughing 以及...。
which 引导了定语从句修饰先行词F2F.
stand for 表示...代表... 为...的缩写
eg. U.S.A stands for United States of America.

5. look like 看起来像
sound like 听起来像

6. For example , 8 sounds like -eat in great , so to save time , people write gr8.
比如,8听起来像great 中eat [eit]的发音,因此为了节省时间,人们就写成了gr8[来代表great]。
to save time 为了节省时间,动词不定式做目的状语。

7. Other punctuation marks , such as commas , help add other parts of the face and indicate
different expressions.
其它的标点符号,比如说逗号,可以放在这张鬼脸的其他部位,显示出不同的表情。
such as 比如说,例如。

8. Your best friend will probably understand it ,but your parents and teachers might not.
你最好的朋友可能会明白(短信的内容),但是你的父母和老师可能就不懂。

9. It's not just because they can't comprehend what it means.
这不仅仅是因为他们不明白(短信)的含义。
what it means 是宾语从句,做动词comprehend 的宾语。
意思是"短信的意思是什么"。

五. Culture Note(文化背景)
What's the difference between an e-mail and a letter ? E-mails are a fast and easy way of
contacting friends , family and business associates , but fast is not always best . For formal
situations , such as notices about births , deaths and marriages , it's still preferable to
send e-mail . In business , it's best to reply in the way you have been contacted ; if you
have been sent a letter , sent a letter back . Also , be careful what you write in an e-mail .
Often people do not check , their ideas , spelling and grammar and may look foolish to whoever
reads the message.
电子邮件和信的区别是什么呢?电子邮件是与朋友亲朋、商业往来联系的既方便又快捷的方式,但是快
并不一定就是最好的。在一些重要正式的场合,比如说出生通知,死亡、婚礼的消息,仍然可以用电子邮件
来传递。在商业往来中,最好的答复方式就是你一直用的方式。如果你收到了一封信,就可以发一封信做为
回复。而且,你写电子邮件的时候也要小心仔细。人们通常不检查他们的大意、拼写和语法,结果别人读起
来则觉得乱七八糟的。

【模拟试题】
一. 翻译下列词组
1. 由于...感到害臊__________
2. 过时的__________
3. 发短信__________
4. 最糟糕的是__________
5. 身份的象征
6. 与某人在一起__________
7. 听起来像__________
8. 禁不住做某事__________
9. 代表、代替__________
10. 面对面__________
11. 例如__________
12. 做鬼脸__________

二. 搭配单词和英文注解
1. symbol a. not modern
2. comprehend b. sending text messages with a mobile phone
3. SMS c. words that only some people understand
4. ashamed d. understand
5. secret code e. feeling embarrased about something
6. behind the times f. a picture that means something

三.
Since mobile phones are more and more popular , many teenagers have their own phones . But
do you know the advantages and disadvantages of mobile phones ?
Put the following sentences in the right places , please . (请将句子代号填入表格的横线
上)
1. You can make a call anywhere.
2. Mobile phones can make a lot of noise , especially in a class , or at a meeting .
3. It can be used as a notebook because it can keep many phone numbers.
4. It harms people's physical health.
5. You can take photos with it and then send them to your friends or relatives.
6. You can send fast messages and it costs less than making phone calls.
7. It's easy to be robbed.
8. It's dangerous to receive a call while riding and driving.

Advantages Disadvantages ______ ______ _____ ______ ______ ______ _____ ______ 四. 阅读理解:
A: Cats Have Nine Lives
There is a saying that cats have nine lives . A recent study examined why . Scientists
carried out a study of cats which had fallen out of windows of buildings . Nine out of ten
remained alive after a fall of two storeys or more . One cat which fell from the 32nd floor of
a building only broke a tooth . Interestingly , the cats were in greatest danger of being
killed if they fell from the seventh floor . Falling from either a lesser or greater height
gave them a better chance of survival (生存).
Damage (损伤)to a body depends on how fast it hits the ground , which in turn depends on
how far it has fallen . But it's not quite that simple because , as an object falls through
the air , the air holds it back and slows the object down . After a while the object stops
accelerating (加速)and continues at a fixed speed . This is the terminal (临界)speed .
Bulky (庞大的)things have a lower terminal speed because there is a larger area for the air
to push up on . Heavy things have a higher terminal speed because they push down harder
against the air . Cats have a lower terminal speed than falling people , for example , because
they are quite bulky and not very heavy so that they hit the ground more slowly and are less
likely to be hurt.
Then what does the seventh floor matter ? This is the distance cats take to reach their
terminal speed . After the seventh floor , they may relax and spread out their legs like a
flying squirrel and change their falling position so that they may land on their feet . This
would slow them down and allow their muscles to reduce the force of impact (冲击),and thus
reduce the damage.
1. The scientists came to a conclusion that a fall from the _____ floor was most likely to
kill a cat.
A. sixth B. eighth
C. 33rd D. seventh
2. A falling cat has a lower terminal speed than a falling man because it is _____.
A. bigger but heavier
B. bigger and stronger
C. lighter but relatively bigger
D. smaller and lighter
3. A fall from higher than a seventh floor allows the falling cat _____.
A. to have time to reduce its falling speed
B. to relax and spread out its legs and to land on a safer position
C. to reach the ground softly on its back
D. to fall slower than from the sixth floor
4. Which of the following pictures best shows the usual sight of a cat falling from the
eighth floor shortly before it hits the ground ?

5. Do cats really have nine lives ?
A. Yes , they do.
B. No , they don't.
C. Yes , it does.
D. No , it doesn't.

B. The Cats : First Eat , Then Wash
There is a story which tells how Man wanted to build a house . First he asked Dog to help
him . Dog was not interested and said he wouldn't . Then Man asked Cat. Cat was pleased to
help . When the house was finished , Cat was told to sleep inside by the fire . As for Dog ,
Man told him he would have to sleep out of doors . That is why dogs often sleep outside , but
cats seldom do.
Do you know why the cat eats first and washes afterwards ? One day the unfortunate (不走
运的)Mouse (老鼠)was just about to be eaten by Cat . Mouse was quite minded . He said to
Cat. "Don't you have any manners at all ? Everyone knows you should wash your hands and face
before you eat. "The cat was ashamed (害羞)at this and began to wash . While Cat was
washing , Mouse ran off , and so Cat lost her meal . Ever since then cats have always eaten
first and washed themselves afterwards.
1. Where do cats sleep ?
A. Outside .
B. Inside.
C. At the home.
D. Out of door.
2. Why did Man let cats sleep at home ? Because ______.
A. he likes cats very much
B. he wanted to sleep with cats
C. cats helped Man to build the house
D. cats liked to sleep at home
3. What did the mouse do when the cat was washing ?
A. The mouse ran away.
B. The mouse was also washing.
C. The mouse watched the cat washing
D. The mouse was talking with the cat.
4. After that cats always _____.
A. wash themselves before the meal
B. have good manners
C. eat first and wash afterwards
D. wash first and eat afterwards
5. The story is about _____.
A. Cat B. Dog
C. Cat and Dog D. Man , Cat and Mouse


【试题答案】
一.
1. be ashamed of
2. behind the times
3. send fast messages
4. worst of all
5. status symbol
6. be with sb
7. sound like
8. can't help doing
9. instead of
10. face to face
11. such as
12. make faces
二. 1. f 2. d 3. b 4. e 5. c 6. a
三. Advantages : 1356
Disadvantages 2478
四. 1. DCBBB 2. BCACA

Review of Units 1-5(1-5单元复习)
归纳总结
一. 语法
1. 动名词的用法:
(1)动名词兼有动词和名词的特征,由动词加-ing构成。
(2)用法
A. 作主语
She said that memorizing the words of pop songs also helped a lot.
B. 作宾语
Now, I am enjoying learning English.
Thanks for sending me the E-mail.
C. 作定语
I think that doing a lot of listening practice is one of the secrets......
2. used to 的用法
"主语+used to+动词原形+其它"这个句型结构表示过去的习惯,暗示现在已无此习惯。

其否定形式是主语+didn't use to +动原
问句形式为:Did+主语+use to+...?
反意疑问句:主语+used to+...,did+主语?
和used to 相关的其它句型:
get / be used to doing 习惯于做...
be used for doing被用来
3. 简单的被动语态
当主语是动作的承受者时,应用被动语态。
一般现在时被动语态:主语+is/am/are+过去分词
一般过去时被动语态:主语+was/were+过去分词
一般将来时被动语态:主语+will be+过去分词
含有情态动词的被动语态:主语+情态动词+be+过去分词
4. allow句型
(1)allow sb to do sth 允许某人做某事
We do not allow people to smoke in the hall.
(2)allow doing允许做某事
(3)be allowed to do 被允许做某事
(4)should be allowed to do 应该被允许做某事
5. 虚拟语气
构成:主句:主语+would+动原
从句if+主语+过去式(be动词一律用were)+其它
用法:
A. 表示与事实相反的假设
B. 表示不可能实现的事情
C. 用于提建议
6. 提建议句型总结
(1)I think you should / could do.
(2)You had better do.
(3)If I were you, I would do.
(4)What about / How about doing?
(5)Why not do ...? / Why don't you do ...?
7. 表示推断的情态动词
(1)can't(0%)(2)might / could (20%-80%)(3)must 90%
这几个表示推测的情态动词后面可接:
A. +名词
He must be a boy.
B. +物主代词
It must be Mary's / mine.
It must be Mary's book.
C. +形容词
She must be very sad.
D. +be +doing
She must be doing his homework.
二. 话题:
(1)学会怎样学习
(2)谈论过去的习惯及描述人物特征
(3)谈论规章、制度及同意或不同意
(4)谈论虚拟的情景
(5)对可能的情况进行推断
三. 主要词组
Unit 1
(1)make flashcards做闪视卡片
(2)study for a test为考试用功
(3)make vocabulary lists做单词表
(4)ask...for help求助于...
(5)practice conversations with friends和朋友一起练习对话
(6)read aloud to practice pronunciation 大声朗读来练习发音
(7)improve the speaking skills提高口语能力
(8)too ...to... 太...而以致于不能做
(9)memorize the words of pop songs记忆流行歌曲的歌词
(10)feel differently感觉不同
(11)join the English club加入英语俱乐部
(12)end up (with...) 以......结束
(13)do a survey做调查
(14)watch English-language TV 看英语电视
(15)make mistakes in grammar 出语法错误
(16)get the pronunciation right 把读音弄准
(17)first of all 首先,第一
(18)to begin with 首先
(19)later on 过后
(20)be afraid to do ... 害怕做
(21)make complete sentences做完整的句子
(22)take a lot of grammar notes记大量的语法笔记
(23)enjoy learning English喜欢学英语
(24)have trouble doing sth. 做某事有麻烦
(25)look up the words in a dictionary 查字(词)典
(26)this kind of paper这种纸
(27)speak English as a second language 把英语当做第二语言来说
(28)be ashamed of ... 对......感到羞愧
(29)behind the times过时
(30)become an expert at ... 成为......的专家
(31)spend ...on ... 在......上花费(时间、金钱)
(32)give up 放弃
(33)in the future 在将来
Unit 2
(1)used to 过去常常
(2)be afraid of ... 害怕......
(3)play the piano 弹钢琴
(4)be interested in ... 对......感兴趣
(5)speak in front of a group 在人群面前讲话
(6)be terrified of ... (极为)害怕......
(7)sleep with the light on 开着灯睡觉
(8)all the time 一直
(9)chew gum吃口香糖
(10)chat with sb. 和某人聊天
(11)in the last few years 在过去的几年里
(12)send messages 发信息
(13)be able to 能够
(14)be made up of ... 由......组成的
(15)sound like ... 听起来像
(16)stand for ... 代表......
(17)cant' stop doing sth. 禁不住做某事
(18)instead of ... 代替......
Unit 3
(1)should be allowed to ... 应该被允许......
(2)have part-time jobs 做兼职工作
(3)get the ears pierced 扎耳眼
(4)stop wearing that silly earring 停止戴那种傻的耳坠
(5)choose my own clothes 挑选我自己的衣服
(6)clean up 收拾干净
(7)fail a test 测验不及格
(8)pass the test 通过测试
(9)be strict in sth. 对某事严格
(10)be strict with sb. 对某人严格要求
(11)the other day 有一天
(12)get to doing sth. 着手做......
(13)concentrate on ... 集中精力于......
(14)learn a lot from each other 相互学到很多知识
(15)at present 近来
(16)have an opportunity to do sth. 有做某事的机会
(17)at least至少
(18)take time to do sth. 花时间做某事
(19)feel sleepy感到困倦
(20)have a day off 休一天假
(21)chat online with friends网上和朋友聊天
(22)in fact 事实上
(23)as well as ... 而且......,也......
(24)realize the dream through great effort通过艰苦的努力实现梦想
(25)be proud of ... 以......为骄傲(自豪)
Unit 4
(1)give ...to charities 把......给慈善机构
(2)buy snacks 买零食
(3)won the lottery 彩票中奖
(4)medical research 医疗研究
(5)be nervous 紧张
(6)what if ... 即使......又会怎么样呢?
(7)get pimples 起鸡皮疙瘩
(8)let me have one 让我有一个
(9)speak in public 在公共场合讲话
(10)without permission 未经允许
(11)introduce oneself 自我介绍
(12)not ...in the slightest 一点也不
(13)plenty of 许多......,足够的......
(14)be easy to get along with 容易相处
(15)would rather ... than ... 宁愿......也不愿......
(16)English speech contest 英语演讲比赛
(17)let sb. down 使某人失望
(18)millions of people 数百万人
(19)get hurt 受伤
(20)stop ...from doing 阻止......做某事
Unit 5
(1)belong to ... 属于......
(2)call the police 报警
(3)find something strange 找到奇怪的东西
(4)escape from... 从......逃走
(5)an ocean of ... 无尽的,用不完的
(6)be careful of ... 当心......
(7)use up ... 用完
四. 主要句型
Unit 1
(1)How do you study for a test? I study by listening to cassettes.
(2)How do you learn English? I learn by studying with a group.
(3)Do you learn English by reading aloud? Yes, I do.
Unit 2
(1)I used to be afraid of the dark.
(2)Mario used to be short.
(3)You used to have long hair, didn't you?
(4)Did you used to have straight hair? Yes, I did.
(5)Did you use to play the piano? No, I didn't.
Unit 3
(1)I think students should be allowed to do homework with friends.
I disagree. They talk instead of doing homework.
(2)Sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to drive.
I agree. They aren't serious enough at that age.
(3)Do you think sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to work at night?
No, I don't.
Unit 4
(1)What would you do if you won a lottery?
I'd give it to charities.
(2)If I were you, I'd wear a shirt and tie.
(3)If I were you, I'd take an umbrella.
Unit 5
(1)Whose notebook is this?
It might Ning's. It has her name on it.
(2)Whose French book is this?
It could be Ali's. She studies French.
(3)Whose guitar is this?
It might belong to Alice. She plays the guitar.
(4)Whose T-shirt is this?
It can't be John's. It's much too small for him.
【模拟试题】
I. 单项填空(15%)
1. The most important thing I can _______ you is using English often.
A. speak B. tell C. talk D. say
2. Do you know if he ________ back in two hours?
A. will be come B. comes
C. has been D. will be
3. What are you like? _________.
A. I like funny and energetic things
B. I'm funny and energetic
C. I look like my funny and energetic father
D. I feel energetic
4. Another thing that he _________ very difficult was English grammar.
A. finds B. knows C. found D. learned
5. It ________ me a lot of time _________ an English composition last time.
A. takes, to write B. spends, to write
C. spent, writing D. took, to write
6. He ________ in the library for he called me from there a few minutes ago.
A. should be B. must be C. would be D. might be
7. I can hardly hear the radio. Would you please ________?
A. turn it on B. turn it down C. turn it up D. turn it off
8. They don't think it is good to have conversations with friends, because they always end
up the speaking in Chinese when they get something ________.
A. is exciting B. with exciting C. excited D. exciting
9. You should keep the window _________ because the room is so hot and damp.
A. open B. closed C. opened D. close
10. The old woman has two sons, but ________ of them lives with her.
A. both B. either C. neither D. none
11. She often goes to bed with her bedroom _______.
A. light on B. on light C. on lighting D. lighted on
12. It is not a good habit _________ in public places.
A. chewing gum B. to chew gum
C. to chew gums D. chew gums
13. Lily, Don't forget _________ your sister at the airport. The plane will _________ in an
hour.
A. meet, arrive B. to meet, arrive
C. meeting, get D. meeting, reach
14. Would you mind ________ smoking? _______, I'll do it in a few days.
A. to give up, Not at all B. giving up, Of course
C. giving up, It's pleasure D. giving up, Not at all
15. Peter is never late for school, ______ he? ________. He always comes on time.
A. is, Yes B. isn't, No C. is, No D. isn't, Yes
II. 用下列方框中的单词和短语的适当形式填空(10%)
get along be fond of pronounce pretend watch
come up with exercise used to be speak belong to
1. We should learn how to _________ the English words correctly from our teachers.
2. He know a little English, but few people can understand him if he uses ______ English.
3. She finds _________ English language movies frustrating because the people speak too
fast.
4. There ________ a bus-stop at the corner of the street five years ago.
5. Most of the boys in our class _________ playing soccer, aren't they?
6. There are lots of skirts on the chair. They can't ________ the boy students.
7. Don't worry. I'm _____ well with my new classmates here.
8. Mom often wakes Kate who __________ to be asleep.
9. He who is running down the street could be running for ________.
10. Li Hong is a confident boy. He always _________ good solutions to his friends' problem.
III. 完形填空(15%)
A.
Greenland is the largest island in the world. It is in the 1 of Europe. Near
Greenland is another island. It is small. Its name is Iceland. Do you think that Greenland is
green and warm? Do you think that Iceland is white with ice? If you do, you are 2 . Not
many people live on the big island of Greenland. There are more people in your hometown than
in all of Greenland. That is because Greenland is not green. Greenland is 3 . Most of the
island is covered with lots of ice. The ice covering Greenland is 4 than the world's
tallest building. What 5 Iceland? Is it colder than Greenland? No, it is not. Iceland has
ice, but not so much ice 6 Greenland. Iceland has a lot of hot springs. They give out hot
water and steam. The climate is not 7 cold as Greenland. And there are a lot 8 people
who live in Iceland.
1. A. east B. west C. south D. north
2. A. right B. wrong C. clever D. bright
3. A. green B. blue C. white D. yellow
4. A. higher B. highest C. more high D. much high
5. A. are B. about C. of D. on
6. A. like B. than C. as D. that
7. A. such B. so C. too D. much
8. A. many B. much C. more D. most
B.
There are many kinds of sports. They are team sports and individual sports. Team sports
are such sports 1 baseball, basketball, and volleyball. Team sports need two separate
teams. The teams play 2 each other. They compete to get best score. For example, in a
football game, if team A gets 7 points and team B gets 3 points, team A 3 the game. Team
sports are sometimes called competitive sports.
Besides team sports, there is 4 main type, or kind, of sporting activity. The second
type is individual sports. In individual sports there are 5 teams. There isn't any
competition. People play individual sports in order to get exercise. They 6 play
individual sports for the competition. Generally speaking, they want to get some exercise,
not to 7 others. Individual sports include swimming, skiing and running.
1. A. like B. as C. for D. with
2. A. with B. to C. against D. between
3. A. wins B. beats C. gets D. loses
4. A. other B. another C. one D. the other
5. A. few B. not C. no D. none
6. A. can't B. not C. aren't D. don't
7. A. against B. beat C. win D. strike
阅读理解
Reading Comprehension
A
Mother's Day is a holiday for mothers. It is celebrated in the United States,
England, Sweden, India, Mexico and some other countries. Little by little, it becomes
widely celebrated. Mother's Day falls on the second Sunday in May. On that day, many people
send gifts of love to their mothers. Those whose mothers are still living often wear a pink
or red rose or carnation (康乃馨), while those whose mothers are dead wear a white one.
The idea of a day for mothers was first given by Miss Anna Jarvis of Philadelphia (费
城). As a result of her hard work, the celebration of the first American Mother's Day was
held in Philadelphia on May 10, 1908. Soon the holiday became popular throughout the country
and around the world.
In China, people do the same on this special day for mothers. And, in some cities, people
sometimes ask a song to be broadcast for his or her mother only. This might cost a small sum
of money for some of them, but, as it is said, "Love is invaluable. "
Choose the right answers according to the passage. (根据短文内容选择正确答案。)(5%)
1. How many countries are mentioned to celebrate Mother's Day?
A. many B. five C. seven D. all over the world
2. When is Mother's Day?
A. On Sunday B. On the second in May
C. On May 10 D. On the second Sunday in May.
3. A red rose is worn by _______.
A. persons who have healthy mothers
B. healthy mothers
C. persons whose mothers are dead
D. all the mothers
B
Do you like to eat out? Do you like to eat quickly? Do you like inexpensive food? Some
people go to fast-food restaurants for these reasons. In fact, many people in the states
still go to diners today for the same reasons.
A man named Walter Scott had the first "diner"in 1872. It wasn't a real diner. It was
only a food cart. People on the street walked up to the cart to buy food. These cart served
latenight workers who wanted a cup of coffee and a latenight meal. The meal was a sandwich or
boiled eggs. In 1887, Samuel Jones built the first diner big enough to allow the customers to
come inside. However, they did not sit down. Later, people built diners with counters and
stools, and people sat down while they ate.
Before long, many diners stayed open around the clock. In other words, people were able
to eat in a diner at any time. Diners changed in other ways, too. The original menu of
sandwiches and coffee became bigger. It included soup, favorite dishes, and a breakfast
menu. In addition, diners soon became permanent buildings. They were no longer carts on
wheels.
Diners today look similar to the diners of the early 1900s. They are usually buildings
with large windows. Inside, the diners have shining counters with stools, booths, and tables
and chairs. People can eat all three meals in a modern diner.
Today, many people eat in fast-food restaurants such as McDonald''s and Burger King.
However, the diner remains an America tradition, and thousands of people still enjoy eating
there. It was popular a century ago, and it is still popular today.
Choose the right answers according to the passage. (根据短文内容选择正确答案。)(5%)
1. A man named Walter Scott had the first "diner"in 1872. Why is diner in quotation marks
(引号)?
A. Because it is spelled differently from "diner"
B. Because the first diner was not a real diner.
C. Because diner was a new word.
D. Because it is a special kind of restaurant.
2. What meals did the first diners serve?
A. Only breakfast.
B. Only lunch
C. Only night-meals.
D. All of the above.
3. Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?
A. Diners existed before fast-food restaurants.
B. The menu included more food than sandwich and coffee.
C. Burger King is a fast-food restaurant.
D. Sandwiches became bigger.
4. The main idea of the passage is _______.
A. the diner is a traditional, popular place to eat in the United States
B. Samuel Jones built the first diner big enough to allow the customers to come inside
C. American diners serve many types of food 24 hours a day to their customers
D. diners are different from fast-food restaurants in many ways
C
Laptop (便携式)computers are popular all over the world. People use them on trains and
airplanes, in airports and hotels. These laptops connect people to their workplace. In the
United States today, laptops also connect students to their classrooms.
Westlake College in Virginia will start a laptop computer program that allows students to
do schoolwork anywhere they want. Within five years, each of the 1500 students at the college
will receive a laptop. The laptops are parts of a 10 million computer program at Westlake, a
110-year-old college. The students with laptops will also have ways to the Internet. In
addition, they will be able to use e-mail to "speak"with their teachers, their classmates,
and their families. However, the most important part of the laptop program is that students
will be able to use computers without going to computer labs. They can work with it at home,
in a fast-food restaurant or under the trees-anywhere at all!
Because of many changes in computer technology, laptop use in higher education, such as
colleges and universities are workable. In addition, the portable computers can connect
students to not only the Internet, but also libraries and other resources. State officials
are testing laptop programs at other universities, too.
At Westlake College, more than 60 percent of the staff use computers. The laptops will
allow all teachers to use computers in their lessons. As one Westlake teacher said, "Here we
are in the middle of Virginia and we're giving students a window on the world. They can see
everything and do everything. "
Choose the right answers according to the passage. (根据短文内容选择正确答案。)(10%)
1. The main purpose of the laptop program is to give each student a laptop to ________.
A. use for their schoolwork
B. have ways to the Internet
C. work at home
D. connect then to libraries
2. Why is the word "speak"in the second paragraph in quotation marks (引号)?
A. They don't really talk.
B. They use the computer language.
C. Laptops have speakers.
D. None of the above reasons is correct.
3. "A window on the world"in the last paragraph means that students can ________.
A. attend lectures on information technology
B. travel around the world
C. get information from around the world
D. have free laptops
4. Which of the following is true about Westlake College?
A. All teachers use computers.
B. 1500 students have laptops.
C. It is an old college in America.
D. Students there can do everything.
D
Students can benefit from homework in many ways. To begin with, students have to revise
what they have learned in class in order to do their homework. This gives them the chance to
see if they have understand everything the teacher has said and practice what they have
learned. Another advantage is that students have to work on their own when they do their
homework and do not depend on teachers and classmates for help.
However, there are also disadvantages to homework. Firstly, homework needs a lot of time
and effort, so students have no time for their favorite hobbies and activities. What is more,
many students complain that homework is boring because they have to do the same things again
and again.
Fill in the table below according to the passage. (根据短文内容填写下表。)(10%)
Advantages Disadvantages 1. revise ___________ 5. need ___________ 2. ______ everything that the teachers said 6. ______ for hobbies and activities 3. _______ what they have been taught 7. complain that they ________ 4. have to work ________ 8. repeat _________ 综合语言运用
Comprehensive Language Practice
I. 刘东和赵芳来看你,正好你爸爸在家。请向你爸爸介绍你的两位同学的性格和爱好,包括以前和现在的
变化。(可参考下列表格,*表示喜欢的项目。)(10%)
Liu Dong Liu Dong Zhao Fang Zhao Fang then now then now Ball games *   * Listen to music * * * Watch English movies * * Read novels *   II. 罗伯特随父母在澳大利亚住了两年,现在他的听说能力是全班最好的。假如你有出国的机会,你会怎样
提高自己的听说能力呢?(10%)
III. 根据实际情况,使用下列表格中的短语写出至少五条你们家的家规。(最好用不同句型。)(10%)
get up be late for school
clean one's room wear our own clothes
have one's hair cut get one's ears pierced
have breakfast at home come back home in time after school
not to watch TV too long study with friends
finish homework take shower before going to bed
borrow money from others not to try to drive a car


【试题答案】
基础知识运用
I. 1. B 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. D
6. B 7. C 8. D 9. A 10. C
11. A 12. A 13. B 14. D 15. A
II. 1. pronounce 2. spoken 3. watching 4. used to be
5. are fond of 6. belong to 7. getting along 8. is pretending
9. exercise 10. comes up with
III. A. 1. D 2. B 3. C 4. A
5. B 6. C 7. B 8. C
B. 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. D 7. B
阅读理解:
A. 1. B 2. D 3. A
B. 1. B 2. C 3. D 4. A
C. 1. A 2. A 3. C 4. C
D. 1. what they have learned
2. understand 3. practice
4. on their own 5. a lot of time and effort
6. have no time 7. are bored 8. the same thing
综合语言运用
I. Hi, Dad. This is my good friend Liu Dong. His English is on the top of our class,
because he likes watching English movies. He can understand what the actors say in the
movies. He also enjoys reading novels. He reads them a lot and he can tell us many funny
stories. He is calm and talented now. He has changed a lot. In the old days he was energetic
and hardly ever tired. He used to like ball games, and he often spent much time playing ball
games with us. I remember that he used to listen to music very much, but now he said it was
boring. Well, this is Zhao fang, the best friend of mine. She is always outgoing and
confident. She used to like listening to music and watching English movies. But now her
favorite activity is playing basketball. Of course she still likes music and often listens to
them. I have the same interest as she. No wonder we are good friends.
II. I have learned English for several years. But I have never been abroad. If I were in
an English-language country, I would watch English TV every day. And if I had enough money, I
would watch many English movies. I would watch the actors say the words and follow them. I
would listen to the pop music and read English newspapers and magazines so as to improve my
listening and speaking ability. If I lived with the native speakers, I would like to talk
with them and learn from them. I want to be as good at listening and speaking as Robert.
III.
1. We must get up at six ten every morning.
2. Everyone has to clean his room by himself twice a week.
3. We are not allowed to watch TV on school nights.
4. Nobody should be allowed to try to drive a car except father.
5. All the members of our family aren't allowed to borrow money from others.

Unit 1 How do you study for a test ?
(一)学习目标(Language Goal)
1. Talk about how to study . 学会讨论各种学习方法和策略。
2. Find out your suitable learning methods. 找出适合自己的学习方法。

(二)语言结构(Language Structures)
1. Verb + by with gerund by+动名词短语 表示"通过...途径,方法"
2. How questions have引导的特殊疑问句

(三)目标语言(Target Language)
1. How do you study for tests ? 你是怎样准备考试的?
Well , I study by working with my classmates.
哦,我和同学们一起学习。
2. Have you ever studied with a group ?
你曾经参加过学习小组吗?
Yes , I have . I've learned a lot that way .
是的,参加过。通过这种方式我学了许多。
3. I don't have a partner to practice English with .
我没有同伴可以练习英语。
Maybe you should join an English club.
或许,你应该参加一个英语俱乐部。
4. What about reading aloud to practice pronunciation ?
大声朗读来练习发音怎么样?
Why don't you join an English language club ?
你为什么不参加一个英语俱乐部呢?

(四)Key words and phrases (重点词汇)
1. flashcard n. 抽认卡
2. frustrating a. 令人沮丧的
3. memorize v. 记忆,背诵
4. aloud adv. 出声地、高声地
5. comma n. 逗号
6. pronunciation n. 发音
7. solution n. 解决办法
8. not at all 根本(不) 全然(不)
9. end up 结束,告...终
10. make mistakes 犯错
11. later on 以后;随后
12. be afraid to 害怕去做
13. laugh at sb. 笑话;取笑(某人)
14. take notes 做笔记,做记录
15. enjoy doing sth . 喜欢做...乐意做...
16. native speaker 说本族语的人
17. make up 组成、构成

(四)重点、难点:(Key points and difficulties)
1. by 介词,表示"通过...方法或途径"的意思,译成"靠、通过"
by后面可以加名词或动名词短语
eg.
(1)The house was destroyed by fire. 房屋被火烧毁了。
(2)travel by air (land , sea)航空(陆路、航海)旅行。
(3)go by train (boat , bus)乘火车(船,公共汽车)去
(4)shake sb by the hand 和某人握手
(5)I study English by watching English movies. 我通过看英文电影学英语。
另外,by做为介词的含义有很多,我们也已经学习过一些用法,总结如下
(1)在...旁边、靠近
eg. There is a power station by the river. 河边有一个电厂。
(2)沿着、经由eg. come by the highway 由公路来
(3)由于 eg. by mistake 由于差错
(4)被、由 eg. some articles written by Luxun. 一些由鲁迅写的文章
(5)(表示面积)eg. a room 5m,by4m 一间长五米宽四米的房间
(6)逐批 eg. One by one 一个接一个
(7)表示方法、途径 如上

2. "How"questions
How 引导特殊疑问句,有两种含义
(1)表示问候
eg. How do you do ?
How are you ?
How's everything going ?
(2)表示"怎样"
eg. How is your new house ?
你的新房子怎么样?
It's great.
它太棒了。
How do you learn English ?
你是怎样学英文的?
I learn English by reading lots of English magazines.
我通过读大量英文杂志学习英文。
请同学们注意how和what引导的疑问句是不一样的,不能混淆。
how通常对程度或方式进行提问,意为"怎么样",回答通常做状语或表语,what 常对动作的发出者或
接受者进行提问,意为"什么",回答通常主语或宾语。
试比较:
(1)How is your summer holiday ? It is perfect. (表程度,表语)
(2)How did you travel around the world ?
I travelled by bike. (表方式,状语)
(3)What do you learn at school ?
I learn Chinese , English , Maths and other subjects.
(学习的科目,做宾语)

3. 在这一单元中出现的话题是"讨论如何学习"。这个话题既有趣又实用,既能锻炼我们的口语表达能
力,又能使我们学到一些实用的方法,对自身的学习大有帮助。如何向别人请教学习方法呢?又如何回答
呢?
请诵读下面的目标句型:
How do you study English ? (运用特殊疑问句)
I study by listening to cassetts. (听录音带)
I study by studying with a group. (和小组一起学习)
by watching English programs on TV. (看英语电视节目)
by enjoying English songs. (听英文歌)
by taking part in English classes after school . (上课外英语班)
by getting an English tutor. (请英语家教)
by reading English magazines and newspaper . (读英文杂志、报纸)
by surfing the internet. (网上冲浪)
by making flashcards. (制作单词认读卡片)
by reading the textbook. (读教科书)
by asking the teacher for help. (请教老师)
by making vocabulary lists. (列单词表)
by taking notes carefully . (认真记笔记)
by having the English class carefully . (认真上课)
by finishing my homework seriously . (认真完成作业)
Do you learn English by ...? (用一般疑问句)
Yes , I do . / No , I don't.
Have you ever studied with a group ? (用完成时态)
Yes , I have . I've learned a lot that way.
What about listening to cassettes ? [用what about +动名词 提问]
I do that sometimes. I think it helps.

4. 学会评价各种学习方法的优劣(Comment on the ways of learning English)
看到了上面各种各样的学习方法,有些眼花缭乱。其实,并不是所有的方法都适合自己。我们要学会判
断、评价,然后才能选择最适合自己的
用哪些语言才能表达自己的评价呢?请看下面的目标句型:
I think studying English by ...is...because ... 如:I think studying English by working with a group is a good way because you can ask
others when you have questions.
I think surfing the internet is a bad way because you have to use a computer and always
waste your time.
...
这个句型较长是个复合句,出现了由because 引导的原因状语从句。进入初三后,我们在写作表达时,
要避免再使用仅仅由because 引导的句子,而要写完整的句子。
如:不能写Because I slept late . 意思不完整,不清晰
要写成I missed the early bus because I slept late .
这样,有原因,有结果,才是完整的句子。

5. 找出自己在英语学习中的困难 (Find out your own difficulties in learning English)
要选择适合自己的学习方法,还必须清楚自己的困难所在,然后才能有的放矢。
learning English can be difficult . What things are difficult for you ?
我们如何来表达自己学习与遇到的困难呢?如何给出建议呢?
请诵读下面的目标句型:说出困难:
I have a problem . I can't remember the new words.
I can't pronounce some of the words.
I can't understand spoken English .
I always make mistakes in grammer.
I read very slowly.
I don't know how to speak English well.
给出建议:
You should read English aloud.
Listening can help.
Why don't you join an English language club to practice speaking.
Would you mind remembering new words by flashcards.
Please try to talk with your friends in English as much as possible.
(请注意不同句式的运用)

6. 选择适合自己的学习方法(Choose your suitable learning ways)
通过以上各个环节的学习,我们终于可以完成最后的目标--选择适合自己的方法。
如何表达呢?目标句型如下:(注意要给出原因,练习使用because)
I (don't) think I can study English by ... , because ... (1)I think I can study English by listening to English songs because I love music too.
(2)I don't think I can get an English tutor because I want to learn by myself at home.
找到适合自己的方法,写出至少五句。

(六)3a in Section A 疑难解释
1.
eg. He asked his mother to buy him a new bicycle.
他请求他母亲给他买一辆新自行车。

2. Many said they learnt by using English .
许多(学生)说他们通过使用英语来学习。
Many在这里是代词,而不是形容词,意为Many students.
Many is a large number of something.
例如:We can put away many of these plates . We don't need this many.
我们可以把许多盘子收起来,用不着这么多。

3.
eg. I felt frustrated at that time. 那时,我觉得很沮丧。
类似的还有




请同学们在学习中注意收集

4. not at all 根本不,全然不
eg. My brother did not like the scarf at all.
not经常可以和助动词结合在一起,at all 则放在句尾

5. get excited 变得兴奋起来 get是系动词,有"逐渐变得"的含义
get + adj
eg. get mad 生气
get clear变得清楚了
The long journey got the children all tired.
长途旅行使得孩子们疲惫不堪。

6. end up doing sth 终止做某事,结束做某事 后面加动名词短语
相当于finish doing sth .
但要注意与stop doing sth 的区别

eg. We had to stop singing because somebody knocked at the door.
另外,end up with ... 以...结束
The party ended up with her singing.
晚会以她的歌唱而告终。

7. 在3a中,出现了大量的动名词。我们有必要了解动名词的结构及用法,动名词即动词的ing形式,相当
于名词,在句子中可以做主语、宾语、表语定语等。
eg.
(1)I think that doing lots of listening practice is one of the secrets of learning.
doing ...为动名词短语,做从句中的主语,而listening 做定语,修饰practice.
(2)I'm enjoying learning English . (动名词短语做宾语)
(3)Seeing is believing 眼见为实(Seeing 做主语,believing 做表语)

(七)3a in Section B 疑难解析
1. First of all , it wasn't easy for me to understand the teacher.
首先,对我而言,听懂老师的话并不容易。
first of all 首先
It is (was) ...for sb to do sth .
在这个句型中,不定式做真正的主语,it是形式主语。

2. 一些词组
laugh at sb 嘲笑某人
take notes 记笔记
enjoy doing sth 乐意做某事
be impressed 深受感动的

3. 在这篇文章中,出现了许多表示顺序或承接的连词或词组。这些词使全文流畅、生动、层次清晰,条
理清楚。在写作中,正确使用连接词,会使文章增色不少,提高档次。在文章中,出现的词有:
first of all 首先
to begin with 一开始
later on 后来、随
also 也、而且(用于肯定句)
either 也(用于否定句)
so 因此
then然后

【模拟试题】
I. 翻译下列单词或词组
1. 令人沮丧的________ 2. 背诵、记忆________
3. 出声地、高声地________ 4. 发音(v.)________
5. 解决方法________ 6. 根本不________
7. 结束做某事________ 8. 犯错________
9. 害怕做某事________ 10. 说本族语的人________
11. 笑话某人________ 12. 做笔记________
13. 喜欢、乐意做某事________
14. 组成、构成________

II. 连词成句
1. study , How , you , do , for , test a
__________________________ ?
2. by study listening to , I , cassettes
__________________________.
3. you , do , by , learn , reading , English , aloud
__________________________?
4. should , find , you , pen pal a
__________________________.
5. can't , a lot of , I , new , words , memorize
__________________________

III. 将下列方法及理由搭配起来,组成相应的句子
Ways
1. by memorizing the words of pop songs
2. by reading English magazines
3. by using English
4. by studying grammar
5. by watching English movies
6. by joining the English club at school
7. by having conversations with friends
Reasons :
A. because we can practice more and study English well.
B. because the native speakers speak too quickly .
C. because it is a great way to learn sentence structures.
D. because we can get lots of practice and also have fun .
E. because it is the best way to learn new words
F. because we get excited about something and then end up speaking in Chinese
G. because it can help us learn new words

Model : (1)I think I can study English by listening to English because I love music .
(2)I don't think I can study English by getting an English tutor because I will spend
too much money .
1. __________________________
2. __________________________
3. __________________________
4. __________________________
5. __________________________
6. __________________________
7. __________________________

IV. 写作:谈一谈自己学习的情况,包括你遇到的困难,你的解决方法以及未来的学习计划。50字左右
(使用网稿中提供的目标语言)
My English learning

(A)
People living in different countries made different kinds of words . Today there are about
fifteen hundred languages in the world . Each contains many thousands of words . A very large
dictionary , for example , contains four or five hundred thousand words . But we do not need
all these . To read short stories you need to know only about two thousand words . Before you
leave school , you will learn only one thousand or more .
The words you know are called your vocabulary . You should try to make your vocabulary
bigger . Read as many books as you can . There are a lot of books written in easy English for
you to read . You will enjoy them . When you meet a new word , find it in your dictionary .
Your dictionary is your most useful book .
Training Base (阅读理解练习)
根据短文选择最佳答案:
1. The number of different languages spoken is about ______.
A. 150 B. 15,000
C. 500 D. 1,500
2. Before you leave your school , you'll learn _____.
A. only two thousand words
B. five hundred thousand words
C. more than one thousand words
D. three or four thousand words
3. To make your vocabulary bigger , you must ______.
A. get as many dictionaries as you can
B. read as many books as you can
C. buy a lot of books
D. have a very large English dictionary
4. You will enjoy ______.
A. the books written in easy English
B. your dictionary
C. your new words
D. finding new words in a dictionary

根据短文翻译下列句子:
5. A very large dictionary , for example , contains four or five hundred thousand words.
___________________________________
6. There are a lot of books written in easy English for you to read.
____________________________

(B)限时阅读
Small children often laugh at the short ones or at someone who isn't dressed as well as
they are . But as they grow up , they learn not to hurt people's feelings by laughing at
their problems . They learn to laugh at other things . Most important they learn to laugh at
themselves.
Suppose (假设)you're playing a game . You make a mistake and lose . Do you become angry ?
Or can you laugh at yourself and hope to do better next time ? Suppose you are at a special
dinner . You at times spill (溅)some food . Why keep worrying about how clumsy (笨拙)you
looked ? Why not laugh it off and enjoy yourself any way ? If you can , it's a good sign
you've really grown up .
Answer the questions
( )1. This article is mostly about ______.
A. why laughter is good for your body
B. what you should laugh at
C. where you may laugh
D. who you may laugh
( )2. The writer says small children laugh at people who ______.
A. have problems B. not to be worried
C. dress well D. play games
( )3. Next the writer shows how laughter could help you ______.
A. not to spill food B. not to be worried
C. not to enjoy yourself D. to grow up
( )4. The most important thing is to learn how to laugh at ______.
A. jokes B. pictures
C. children D. yourself
( )5. The writer shows how laughter could help you not to ______.
A. make a mistake B. lose game
C. become angry D. try again
 

【试题答案】
I. 1. frustrating 2. memorize 3. aloud
4. pronounce 5. solution 6. not at all
7. end up doing sth 8. make mistakes
9. be afraid to 10. native speaker
11. laugh at sb 12. take notes
13. enjoy doing sth 14. make up
II.
1. How do you study for a test ?
2. I study by listening to cassettes .
3. Do you learn English by reading aloud ?
4. You should find a pepal .
5. I can't memorize a lot of new words.
(答案不唯一)
III.
1. I think I can study English by memorizing the words of pop songs because it is the best
way to learn new words.
2. I think I can study English by reading English magazines because it can help us learn new
words .
3. I think I can study by using English because we can practice more and study English well .
4. I think I can study by studying grammar because it is a great way to learn sentence
structures.
5. I don't think I can learn English by watching English movies because the native speakers
speak too quickly .
6. I don't think I can study English by having conversations with friends because we get
excited about something and then end up speaking in Chinese.
7. I think I can learn English by joining the English club at school because we can get lots
of practice and also have fun .
IV. 略
V. 阅读
A. 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A
5. 比如,一本大字典包含40万到50万个单词
6. 有大量的简易英语读物,你可以阅读。
B. 1. D 2. A 3. B 4. D 5. C

Unit 2 I used to be afraid of the dark
[语言目标]language goal:
Talk about what you used to be like.
谈论你过去的外表。

[学习目标]Functions:
1. 学会陈述自己过去常做的事情
2. 学会陈述自己过去的爱好等
3. 能够表达自己现在和过去在外表、性格、娱乐等方面的变化
4. 能够表达朋友、家人等现在和过去的变化

[语言结构]Target Language:
1. I used to be short when I was young.
我年轻时个子很矮。
2. -Did you use to have straight hair?
你过去是直发吗?
-Yes, I did. 是的。
3. -Did you use to play the piano?
你过去弹钢琴吗?
-No, I didn't. 不,我不弹。
4. I used to be afraid of dark.
我过去害怕黑暗。
5. I'm terrified of the snakes.
我害怕蛇。
6. -Did you use to be afraid of being alone?
你过去害怕独自一人呆着吗?
-Yes, I did. 是的,我怕。
7. I used to walk to school.
我过去走着上学。

[主要词汇]Vocabulary:
dark 黑暗 sure 无疑,确实 terrify 使害怕,使恐惧
on 接通的,工作着的 spider 蜘蛛 insect 昆虫
chew 嚼,咀嚼 gum 口香糖 right 立即,马上
comic 连环漫画 hardly 不十分,简直没有
used to do sth. 过去经常 be interested in 对...感兴趣
be on the swim team 是游泳队成员 be afraid of 害怕
be terrified of 害怕 with the light on 灯开着做...
worry about 担心 chew gum 嚼口香糖
these days 目前,如今 not...anymore 不再

[词汇复习]recycling:
short hair 短发 curly hair 卷发
long hair 长发 straight hair 直发
tall 高的 short 矮的
(be)medium height 中等身高 thin 瘦的
heavy 重的,沉的 (have/has) a medium build 中等胖瘦

[语法分析]
一、本单元语法重点内容是used to这个句型。
1. "主语+used to+动词原形+其它"。在这个句型结构中used to的含义为"过去常常"。表示过去的习
惯,暗示现在已无此习惯,请看图:

Dave在过去几年中一直在factory(工厂)中工作,但现在他在Supermarket(超市)中工作,所以Dave
used to work in a factory. 隐含的意思是:Dave worked in a factory before but he doesn't work
there now.
如果用时间轴表示的话,应该是这样的。
2. 我们可以说I used to work.../She used to have.../they used to be...等等,也就是说used这个词没
有人称的变化,to后面接动词原形。
used to be
work
have
play etc. 请看例句:
·When I was a child, I used to like chocolate
·I used to read a lot of books but I don't read much these days.
·Liz has got short hair now but it used to be very long.
Liz现在梳短发,但以前她是长发。
·They used to live in the same street as us, so we often used to see them. But we don't
see them very often these days.
他们过去和我们住在同一条街道,所以我们经常能看见他们,但现在我们不能经常见到他们了。
·Ann used to have a piano, but she sold it a few years ago.
Ann过去有一架钢琴,但几年前她把钢琴卖了。
used to的否定形式是I didn't use to....
·When I was a child, I didn't use to like tomatoes.
当我还是个孩子时,我不喜欢西红柿。
问句形式是did you use to...?
·Where did you use to live before you came here?
当你来这儿之前你住哪儿?
3. used to这个词组只用于讲述过去,我们不能用use to来讲述现在
·I used to play tennis. These days I play golf.
(不说 I use to play golf.)
·We usually get up early.
(不说We use to get up early)
二、anymore
我们用anymore来表示情况或活动的变化。(We use anymore to show a change in a situation or
activity.)
·She used to live in NewYork, but she doesn't live there anymore.
如果动词(或动词短语)相同,则第二个动词可省略。(If the Second Verb phrase has the same
verb, you can omit it.)
·She used to live in London, but she doesn't anymore.
anymore可不与used to连用(You can use anymore without used to)
·She doesn't live in NewYork anymore.
anymore只能和否定词连用
·We don't go there anymore.
·They never talk to me anymore.
·No one likes him anymore.
三、still
我们用still来说明某人或某物没有变化。(Use still to show that something or someone has not
changed)
She still lives in Mexico.
still应放在主要动词前面(Use still before the main verb)
He still lives in New Zealand.
still应放在be动词后面。
He is still crazy after all these years.
still 应放在像can, may, should这样的助动词之后
She can still play the piano.
四、频率副词
频率副词(如always)在句中位置不同。(Adverbs of frequency can appear in different
positions in a sentence.)
它们的位置应是:在主要动词之前,在be动词之后,在助动词(will, can, have等)之后,在used to
之前。
·I usually get up at six.
·You were rarely happy. 你很少高兴。
·You will sometimes hear from them.
·I have seldom spoken to her.
·They never used to dance.
·He always used to call her.
五、词语辨析
1. used to和would
①used to和would都可表示过去的习惯或行为,常可换用。
When we were children we used to/would go skatingevery winter. 我们小时候每年冬天都去滑
冰。
②used to含有较强的"今昔对比"的含义,而would无此含义
I do not swim so often as I used to
我不像过去那样常游泳了。(不能用would代替)
He would sometimes work into the night.
以前他常工作到深夜。(不表示现在他不工作到深夜)
③用would时,有时应有时间状语来加以限制,而used to则可无时间状语
He would go to see Mother every vacation.
(那时)他每个假期去看望妈妈
He isn't what he used to be. 他不再是过去的他。
2. used to do和be used to doing.
①be used to 是"习惯于"某一客观事实和状态,不强调动作,to是介词,后面接名词或动名词,
如:
I am used to the weather here.
我已经习惯于这里的天气了。
He is used to hard work. 他习惯于艰苦的工作。
②get(或become)used to指的是从不习惯到习惯这一过程的转变,另外,它往往包含着克服困难去适
应的意思。
如:You will soon get used to the weather here.
你会习惯于这里的天气的。
In the end, I got used to doing the hard work.
最后,我终于习惯干苦活了。

[单元课文重点分析]
1. I'm on the swim team. (Section A 2b)
我是游泳队成员。
类似的说法还有:I'm on the soccer team 或I play on the soccer team.
2. People sure change. (Section A 2b)
人们的确是要变的。
sure在这里为副词。
如:It sure was cold. 天气确实很冷。
3. Are you still afraid of the dark?
I'm terrified of the dark.
(Section A 3b)
afraid的词组有be afraid of sth 害怕某物

如:She's afraid of dogs.
He's afraid of seeing strangers.
在口语中也说I'm afraid he's out at the moment.
我想他现在出去了。
be terrified of doing sth 是个同义词组。
如:I'm terrified of being alone.
我害怕独自一人呆着。
4. I go to sleep with my bedroom light on. (Section A 3b)
我把卧室的灯开着睡觉。
with的短语表方式
5. 课文Section B 3a 难点
5. these days
"...but these days I get up early and stay in school all day."
these days是个词组,意思是"现在,这几天"
Your son's trouble is very common these days.
你儿子的毛病现在是极常见的。
6. right
Then I go right home and eat dinner.
right在这里是副词,意为"直接地"。
如:The wind blew right in our faces.
风迎面吹来。
7. have to
but now. I have to study.
have to意为"必须"侧重于客观上的必要。
其句型为have (has) to+动词原形
如:We have to leave now.
He has to work on Sunday.
I had to do my homework last Sunday.
8. hardly ever.
These days, I hardly ever have time for concerts.
hardly ever = very seldom.很少
He hardly ever goes to bed before midnight.
他很少在午夜以前就寝。
9. miss
I really miss the old days.
①miss在这里为"怀念"的意思。
How he misses his mother while she is away in London!
他妈妈在伦敦期间,他多么想念她啊!
②此外miss还有"缺"的意思。
I'm afraid that Jim will miss a lot of his lessons.
恐怕Jim会缺很多课。
③错过
I missed catching the 2:15 train.
我未赶上2点15分的火车。
④missing 失去的,缺少的,不在的,失踪的。
They are looking for the missing child.
他们在寻找失踪的孩子。
10. It seems that...(Selfcheck)
It seems that YuMei has changed a lot.

It seems as if he would recover.
看来他好像会康复的。
It seemed that the day would never end.
那天好像没有尽头似的。

【模拟试题】
一、单词分类。请将单词或短语按要求分类,(只写序号)
1 read comics 2 chew gum 3. short 4 get up early 5 medium build
6 play on the swim team 7 sleep with light on 8 play games
9 straight hair 10 heavy 11 watch TV 12 thin 13 paint pictures
14 attend gym class 15 eat candy
A 容貌外表__________ __________ __________ __________ __________
B 生活习惯__________ __________ __________ __________ __________
C 活动爱好__________ __________ __________ __________ __________
二、英英释义。选出正确的英文解释填入相应的括号内。
1. comic a. almost no
2. hardly b. fill with fear
3. insect c. books or magazines with stories in the form of drawings
4. terrify d. winged animals with 6 legs
5. dark e. having little or no light
三、单项选择。
1. I ___________ frustrated when I wasn't sure of the correct answer.
A. may be B. used to C. used to be D. use to be
2. When I was a child, I used to ___________ chocolate.
A. liking B. like C. liked D. likes
3. ___________ work in Microsoft?
A. Did you used to B. Did you use to
C. Do you used to D. Do you use to
4. Where ___________ live before you came here?
A. did you used to B. did you use to
C. use he to D. he used to
5. No one likes him ___________.
A. still B. never C. anymore D. too
6. I am ___________ of spiders.
A. terrify B. terror C. terrifying D. terrified
7. He is afraid of ___________ strangers.
A. see B. seeing C. saw D. seen
8. It ___________ that he has been ill for a long time.
A. seems B. looks C. looks as if D. seems as if
9. I always go to sleep ___________ the light on.
A. in B. with C. to D. and
10. Don't ___________ about things so much. It will make you stressed out.
A. afraid B. terrify C. terrified D. worry
四、看图,用used to完成句子。

五、用used to或一般现在时完成句子。
1. I used to play tennis. I stopped playing a few years ago.
2. Do you do any sport? Yes, I play basketball.
3. 'Have you got a car?''No, I _______________ one but I sold it.'
4. George _______________ a waiter. Now he's the manager of a hotel.
5. 'Do you go to work by car?''Sometimes but most days I_______________ by train.'
6. When I was a child, I never _______________ meat, but I eat it now.
7. Mary loves watching TV. She _______________ TV every evening.
8. We _______________ near the airport but we moved to the city centre a few years ago.
9. Normally I start work at 7 o'clock, so I _______________ up very early.
10. What games __________ you _______________ when you were a child?
六、用used to或anymore的正确形式填空。
My grandmother complains about how things have changed, and she says that life 1 be
better.
Families aren't families the way they 2 be. Everyone's divorced.(离婚) If a husband
and wife are having problems with their marriage, they don't stay together 3 . And
mothers 4 stay home and take care of their children, but not 5 . Everyone's working.
No one has time for children 6 .
And the cars! No one walks 7 ; everybody drives. We 8 walk five miles to school
everyday, even in winter.
And people don't talk to each other 9 . They are too busy to talk, too busy to eat,
too busy to think...
Life 10 be simple, but it isn't 11 .
七、Holly和Greta自从高中以来就是朋友,Greta刚刚参加了他们的20年校庆,在下面的对话中,他们在谈
论他们以前的同学,看图片完成对话,请使用still和anymore的正确形式。(注意一些句子是否定的)

Holly: Did you see Jim Jensen? He used to be so wild!
Greta: Yes, but he 1 (be). He looks very conservative(保守) now.
Holly: Was he thin in high school? I don't remember.
Greta: Yes, and he 2 (be).
Holly: 3 (he, wear) glasses?
Greta: Yes, he does.
Holly: 4 (he play) the guitar?
Greta: Yes, he does, but now he plays classical guitar. He 5 (play) rock and roll
6 .
Holly: Didn't he used to have long hair?
Greta: Yes, he did, but now he's bald. I also saw Jan Bissing at the reunion(校庆).
Remember her? She used to be the most popular girl in school.

Holly: What does she look like now? 7 (she, look) the same?
Greta: Yes, except for her hair. She 8 (have) long, brown hair 9 . It's short and
blonde. And she 10 (be) cute! She 11 (have) those big blue eyes and those thick
eyelashes(眼睫毛).
Holly: There was something different about her...didn't she always used to wear a hat?
Greta: Yes, and she 12 (do).
Holly: Didn't she used to date(和...约会) George Weissler?
Greta: She 13 (do)! In fact, they're going to get married (结婚)next month.
八、看下列表格,用still,anymore和频率副词写一篇文章,注意动词时态,Carol过去是单身。去年她和
George结婚了。George离过婚,并有两个孩子。这个表格显示了Carol生活的变化。请用6句以上的话描述。
always go dancing on weekends stay home on weekends often/usually go out to eat
travel cook dinner
clean the house
do the laundry every day sometimes read novels
go to the beach help kids with homework
go to the beach
read novels seldom/hardly
ever cook
clean go out to eat never stay home on weekends
go to baseball games
have children go dancing
travel



【试题答案】
一、A. 容貌外表 3 5 9 10 12
B. 生活习惯 2 4 7 11 15
C. 活动爱好 1 6 8 13 14
二、1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b 5.e
三、1. C 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. C 6. D 7. B 8.A 9. B 10.D
四、2. He used to play football
3. She used to be a taxi driver.
4. They used to live in the country.
5. He used to wear glasses.
6. This building used to be new.
五、3. used to 4. used to 5. go to work
6. used to eat 7. watches 8. used to live
9. get 10. did...use to play
六、1. used to 2. used 3. anymore
4. used to 5. anymore 6. anymore
7. anymore 8. used to 9. anymore
10. used to 11. anymore
七、1. isn't anymore 2. still is 3. Does he still wear
4. Does he still play 5. doesn't play 6. anymore
7. Does she still 8. doesn't have 9. anymore
10. is still 11. still has 12. still does
13. still does
八、She always used to go dancing on weekends, but now she stays home on weekends; She often
used to go out to eat, but now she cooks dinner every day. She doesn't read novels anymore.
She sometimes help kids with homework. She still goes to the beach.

Unit 3 Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes
教学目标(Language Goal)
1. 能够谈论允许和不允许做的事情
2. 能够谈论应该被允许和不被允许做的事情
3. 能够针对被允许和不被允许做的事情发表自己的观点(同意或者不同意)
4. 能够表达同意或者不同意的理由

目标语言(Target Language)
1. I think sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to drive
我认为应该允许16岁的孩子开车。
2. I disagree . I think sixteen is too young.
我不同意,我认为16岁这个年纪太年轻了。
3. Do you think thirteen-year-olds should be allowed to have part-time jobs ?
你认为应该允许13岁的孩子们做兼职工作吗?
4. No , I don't . 不,我认为不应该。
5. Anna is allowed to wear her own clothes.
安娜可以选择自己的衣服。
6. They are not serious enough at that age.
那个年龄的他们不够稳重。
7. -What rules do you have at home ?
你家有什么规定吗?
-Well , I'm not allowed to go out on school nights.
噢,我在周一至周五不能外出。

词汇和短语(Vocabulary and expressions)
allow 允许 drive 架车 pierce [pis]刺穿
license 执照 driver司机 silly愚蠢的、傻的
earring 耳环 concentrate集中 volunteer自愿、志愿者
Local地方的 perform表演 primary初级的
go out with their friends 和朋友一块出去
part-time jobs 兼职工作
driver's license 驾驶执照
get their ears pierced 穿耳孔
choose one's own clothes 选自己的衣服
sixteen-year-olds 十六岁的孩子
seem to 好像 at that age 在那个年龄
so do we 我们也一样 get to class late . 上课迟到
fail a test 考试不及格 be strict with 对...要求严格
the other day 前几天 get to doing sth 着手做某事
look smart 看起来整洁 concentrate on 关注...
be a good way to do 是...的好方法
It's a good idea for sb to do 是...的好主意
get noisy 变得嘈杂
at present 目前
have an opportunity to do sth .
有做...的机会
be a good experience for sb. 对...来说是很有意义的经历
take time to do things 花费时间做事情
old people's home 敬老院
be sleepy 睏 after a long week of classes 上完一周课之后
have Friday afternoons off 周五放假

语法内容:
一. 被动语态
1. "语态"表示主语和谓语动词之间的关系。英语中有"两态"的说法,即主动语态和被动语态,本单
元中反复出现的should be allowed 就是一个含有情态动词(should)的被动语态。
先看几个基本概念
主语是动作的发出者为主动语态
主语是动作的接受者为被动语态
只有及物动词才有被动语态。

2. 被动语态的构成
(1)请大家看图

The office is cleaned every day .
The office was cleaned yesterday.
Compare active and passive:

动作的接受者the office成了句子的主语,就应该用被动语态。从上面的例句我们可以总结:
一般现在时的被动语态为:主+am / is / are (not)+过去分词
一般过去时的被动语态为:主+was / were +过去分词
如:Butter is made from milk.
This house was built 100 years ago.
以前我们学过的was / were born 生于,就是一个被动语态
born是个过去分词(bear)
-When were you born ? -I was born in 1989.
如果要特别强调动作或行为的执行者,句子后面需接by ~ ,译为"被(由)..."
如:We were woken up by a loud noise .
我们被嘈杂的声音吵醒。
(2)请看图


从上面例子,我们可以看出,现在进行时被动语态的构成为
主语+is / am / are + being +过去分词
再如:
My car is being repaired now.
Some new houses are being built near the park.
公园附近在建一些房子。
(3)请看图

BEFORE NOW


从上面例子,我们可以看出现在完成时被动语态的构成为
主语+have / has +been +过去分词
如:
My key has been stolen.
My keys have been stolen.
I am not going to the party , I haven't been invited.
含有情态动词的被动语态
情态动词+be+过去分词
A note had better be left to him.
Teenagers should be allowed to wear their own clothes
这里我们列举了几个主要时态,那么其它时态呢?
一般将来时 主语+will +be +过去分词
过去将来时 主语+would / should + be +过去分词
过去进行时 主语+was / were + being +过去分词
过去完成时 主语+had + been +过去分词
被动语态的时态是由be的时态决定的,be是什么时态,全句就是什么时态,be动词后面的过去分词不
变。
归纳:
肯定句:主语+be + 过去分词+(by ~)
否定句:主语+be not +过去分词+(by ~)
一般疑问句:Be +主语+过去分词+(by ~)?
特殊疑问句:疑问词+be+主语+过去分词+(by ~)

3. 被动语态的用法:
(1)不知道或没有必要说明动作的执行者是谁,不用by+动作执行者短语
Such books are written for children.
这些书是为儿童写的。
I haven't been told about it .
没有人告诉我这件事
(2)强调动作的承受者,这时应用by短语。
The cup was broken by David.
(3)作客观说明时,常采用一种被动语态句型
It's / was said / believed / reported / + that ...
It's reported that about three hundred people were killed in this earthquake.
据报道,这次地震中大约有三百人死亡。

4. 主动语态变为被动语态
把主动语态的句子变为被动语态的方法是:
(1)把原句中的宾语变为主语
(2)动词改为被动形式,即be+过去分词
(3)原来的主语,如果需要的话,放在by后面,如果没必要,可省略。
注意事项:
主动语态变成被动语态应注意事项
从主动语态到被动语态的过程中主语、谓语动词、宾语都发生变化。
注意主格与宾格的变化形式。
注意主语的人称及数的变化对be动词带来的影响。
注意be动词的时态形式取决于原主动语态的动词时态形式。

5. 被动语态的几种类型
(1)有两个宾语的句子的被动语态(直接宾语,间接宾语)
常见的接双宾语的动词有
通常这种句子可以改为以"人"当主语;和以"物"当作主语的两种被动语态。
如:He gave me a book.
-I was given a book by him. (以I做主语)
-A book was given to me by Tom. (以物book作主语)
He teaches us English.
-We are taught English by him. (以人当主语)
-English is taught us by him. (以物作主语)
(2)含有宾语补足语的句子的被动语态
keep, make 三类的动词常常有宾语补足语,在被动语态中,宾语补足语位置不变。
We keep food fresh in the fridge.
主 谓 宾 宾补
-Food is kept fresh in the fridge.
I saw him go into the office building.
-He was seen to go into the office building.
英语中有"十大动词"的说法,即feel , hear , listen , have , make , let , look , watch ,
see , notice ,这些词在主动句中,其后的动词不定式不加to,但变被动句时必须加to.
(3)含有短语的主动语态变被动语态
不及物动词没有宾语,因此没有被动语态。但有的不及物动词后面加上介词及其他一些词类构成短语动
词之后,其作用相当于及物动词,可以接宾语,因而也可以变为被动语态。在变成被动语态时,不能去掉构
成短语动词的介词或副词
They take good care of my child.
-My child is taken good care of
他们把我的孩子照顾得很好。
I turned off the radio.
-The radio was turned off (by me)
附:动词短语的被动语态
take care of -be taken care of
cut down -be cut down
laugh at -be laughed at
look after-be looked after
下列这些短语本身即是被动语态的形式,不需再加-by
be covered with ...用...覆盖着
be interested in ...对...感兴趣
be surprised at ...对...感到惊奇
be made of (from)用...制造的
(4)由情态动词形成的被动语态
含有情态动词的句子在变为被动语态时,在情态动词后面加上be动词即可,其句型如下:
肯定句:主语+情态动词(can , may , must)+be+ 过去分词...
否定句:主语+情态动词+not + be + 过去分词...
疑问句:情态动词(Can , May , Must )+主语+be+过去分词+....
如:We should allow teenagers to surf the Internet .
-Teenagers should be allowed to surf the Internet.
Can you use it ? 你会使用它吗?
-Can it be used ?
6. 不能用于被动语态的几种情况
(1)当主动结构中的宾语是反身代词和相互代词时,不能改为被动语态。


他在镜中看见了自己的模样。
We often help each other.
我们常常互相帮助。
(2)当谓语是表状态的及物动词时(如have , like , take place , belong to ...)
如:
I like these flowers. 我喜欢这些花。
I will have a meeting.
不说A meeting will be had. 应说A meeting will be held .

二. 重点、难点:
1. the other day
我们还可以说the other day , morning , week , month.
不久前的一天,一个上午、一个星期、一个月等
I saw him in London the other day.
我最近有一天在伦敦见过他。
2. get to 着手做某事
... and I got to talking about the rules ...

He got to doing the homework after supper.
3. concentrate on sth . 专注于某事(做某件事而不做其他事)
He decided to concentrate on English because he just failed the exam.
他决心专攻英语因为他刚刚考试不及格。
This company concentrate on the Chinese market.
这家公司把重点集中在中国市场。
4. be good for 对...有好处 有益于(...that is good for studying ...)
This kind of food is good for me.
这种食物对我身体有益
Sunshine is good for plants.
阳光对植物有益。
5. It's a good idea for sb to do sth. 做...对...来说是个好主意(It's also probably a good
idea for parents to allow ...)
It's a good idea for us to travel to the south.
6. get noisy 变得嘈杂(I know we got noisy sometimes , ...)
noise -noisy

7. learn from 向...学习,从...中学习
... but we learn a lot from each other.
We should learn from our mistakes.
我们应从错误中学习。
8. at present . (At present they're too short. )
at present 此刻、现在=at this time , now
I can't help you at present --I'm too busy
我现在帮不了你--实在太忙了。
9. ... have an opportunity to do sth
有做...的机会
have no opportunity to do 没机会做...
I hope to ...... have an opportunity to go to the States.
I have no opportunity to have a talk with her
I
注意:文中在谈论将来时,用了一些动词过去式和would + 动原的形式
这是虚拟语气。表示对将来的一种假设。

本单元其他句型结构:
1. sixteen-year-olds十六岁的青少年
它相当于一个名词 相当于sixteen -year- old kids.
"一个16岁青少年的表达方式"
a kid sixteen years old
a kid of sixteen
a kid of sixteen years old.
a sixteen-year-old kid

2. stop doing
He should stop wearing that silly earrings.
(Section A 2a)
停止做某事
We two stopped talking.
我们俩个停止了谈话。
3. 主+seem to do sth . 好像
His temperature seems to be all right.
他的体温好像完全正常。
seem其他用法
(1)seem+形容词
The question seems quite easy.
那个问题好像很容易。
(2)seem+名词
That seems a good idea.
那好像是个好主意。
(3)It seems + that 从句
It seemed that nobody knew anything about the matter.
看来没有人知道这件事。
4. So do we (Section A 3a)
So do we 为倒装句,其结构是So + be 动词/助动词/情态动词+主语,在时态上应和上一句保持一
致。应翻译为"我们也是这样"用英文解释是:
We have a lot of rules at my house , too.
5. on school nights , on Friday nights , on Saturday afternoons.
我们在说某个具体的,特定的早晨、下午、晚上时应用on.
6. be strict with 对...要求非常严格
She's very strict with her children.
她待子女很严。
7. old people's home 敬老院
以前我们曾学过old folk's home
8. take time to do things 花费时间做事情。
take在这里为"花费"的意思。
类似的词组有:
It takes sb some time to do sth .
it为形式主语
花...时间做某事
It took me 2 hours to finish the homework.
9. be a great experience for sb.
对...来说是一次很棒的经历。
10. volunteer
(1)n. 志愿者
volunteer groups 志愿小组
volunteers to run Christmas show.
自愿操办、圣诞节表演的人。
(2)v. 自愿或无偿地给予或提供(帮助、建议)
Tim's busy but I'll come , he volunteered.
蒂姆很忙,我来吧,他主动说道。
11. sleepy想睡的(a. )
Are you sleepy ? 你睏吗?
asleep 睡着的、熟睡的
He waits until the children are asleep.
他一直等到孩子们睡着了。
词组fall asleep 入睡
He was just falling asleep when there was a loud knock at the door.
他刚要入睡,就有人大声敲门。

【模拟试题】
一. 被动语态专项练习:
选择填空。
1. In some countries , tea ______ with milk and sugar.
A. is serving B. is served
C. serves D. served
2. Great changes _____ in my hometown since 1980.
A. have been taken place B. took place
C. have taken place D. were taken place
3. The new type of car is going to ______ in three years.
A. turn out B. be turned out
C. has turned out D. have been turned out
4. The woman murdered her friend and ______ to ______.
A. was sentenced , death B. sentencing , die
C. sentenced , death D. sentenced , die
5. -Do you like the skirt ?
-It _______ soft.
A. is feeling B. felt
C. feels D. is felt
6. Are you still here ? You were here an hour ago . Who ________ for ?
A. are you waiting B. did you wait
C. were you waiting D. do you wait
7. _____ to know Professor Zhang.
A. He said B. I said
C. He is said D. It says
8. -I want to sit at the table near the window.
-Sorry , ______ already.
A. it took B. it takes
C. it is taking D. it has been taken
9. The letter _______ three days ago and it ______ yesterday.
A. had post , had arrived
B. was posted , arrived
C. posted , arrived
D. had been posted , was arrived
10. He told me that the final examination _______ next Thursday.
A. is given
B. will be given
C. would have given
D. would be given
11. Water ______ into ice.
A. will changed
B. must be changed
C. should change
D. can be changed
12. Plays ______ twice a month in that theatre.
A. put on B. are put on
C. was put on D. often put on
13. The birds _______ fly away last Saturday.
A. let to B. is let to
C. was let D. were let to
14. A strange sound ______ yesterday evening.
A. was heard B. hears
C. heard D. is heard
15. A beautiful bike _______ him by his classmates.
A. sent to B. will sent to
C. was sent to D. will be sent for
16. Miss Chen ______ just ______ to speak at the meeting.
A. has ...been asked B. has been ...asked
C. Have been ... asked D. have ...been asked
17. Meat _______ out in this shop . We can _________ now.
A. have been sold , get nothing
B. has been sold , get nothing
C. has been sold , get some
D. have been sold , get some
18. The new play _______ in theatre now . Why don't you go in and see it ?
A. is being shown B. is showing
C. is shown D. shows
19. Can you tell _______ ?
A. when did it happen
B. when was it happened
C. when it happened
D. when it was happened
20. ______ the job ______ by Lucy or by John ? Tell me the truth , please.
A. Has ... finished
B. Has ...being finished
C. Is ...finish
D. Has ...been finished

二. 用所给动词的适当时态和语态填空
1. When _____ the first man-made satellite _______ (send)up into space ?
2. Last year vegetables ______ (grow)in the garden by Tom and he ______ (sell)them
himself.
3. She ______ (help)him with his homework tomorrow evening.
4. How many magazines ______ ( can borrow)in your library every week ?
5. John ______ (hear)to go upstairs two hours ago.
6. -Who ______ (save)her father ?
-He ______ (save)by that policeman.
7. The doctor ______ (send for)because his grandpa was ill.
8. Mooncakes ______ (make)by his mother every year . ______ your mother _____ (make)
mooncakes for you every year ?
9. Some toys ______ (buy)as a presents for these children last Monday.
10. _____ paper ______ (make)of wood ?

三. 用所给单词完成句子
1. (the office / clean / yesterday )The office was cleaned yesterday.
2. (the house / paint / last month)The house _________________________
3. (three people / injure / in the accident)_________________________
4. (my bicycle / steal / a few days ago)_________________________
5. (when / this bridge / build ? )_________________________
6. (you / invite / to the party last week ? )_________________________
7. (how / these windows / break ? )_________________________
8. (I / not / wake up / by the noise )_________________________

四. Correct these sentences. (改正下列句子)
1. This house built 100 years ago . This house was built
2. Football plays in most countries of the world. ____________________
3. Why did the letter send to the wrong address ? ____________________
4. A garage is a place where cars repair. ____________________
5. Where are you born ? ____________________
6. How many languages are speaking in Switzerland ? ____________________
7. Somebody broke into our house but nothing stolen. ____________________
8. When was invented the bicycle ? ____________________

五. 填空(完成被动语态填空)
1. They often clean their classroom after school . (改为被动语态)
Their classroom _____ often ______ by them after school.
2. Li Lei gave Tom a new pen last week . (同上)
A new pen _____ _______ _____ Tom last week .
3. A lot of people in China can speak English now . (同上)
English ______ ____ ______ by a lot of people in China now.
4. I have learned English for about two years. (同上)
English ______ ______ ______ for about two years.
5. They will publish these story-books next month. (同上)
These story-books _____ _____ _____ next month.

第三单元参考练习
Unit 3 Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes.
一. 单词分类
1. fifteen-year-olds, 2. serious, 3. kids, 4. have part-time jobs,
5. teenagers , 6. students, 7. calm, 8. get one's ears pierced ,
9. silly , 10. old , 11. choose one's own clothes
12. be home by 10 p.m.
13. go out with friends
14. wild , 15. the young
用于指人_____ _____ ______ _____ ______
家规校规_____ _____ ______ _____ ______
人物特点_____ _____ ______ _____ ______

二. 英英释义(连线)
1. teenagers a. fix one's attention on something
2. part-time b. for only a part of the working day or week
3. concentrate c. kids aged from 13 to 19
4. at present d. begin to
5. get to e. at this time , now

三. 根据中文意思完成句子
1. I _____ _____ ______ to talk with her.
我没机会和她谈话。
2. Everybody has strong points . We should _____ _____ each other.
每个人都有优点,我们应该互相学习。
3. I can't help you _____ ______ . --I'm too busy.
我现在不能帮你--我太忙了。
4. When the comedy actors came out , the audience _____ _____.
当喜剧演员出场时,观众变得嘈杂起来。
5. He decided to _____ ______ English , because he just failed the exam.
他决定专攻英语,因为他刚考试不及格。
6. He _____ ______ doing the homework after supper.
晚饭之后他开始做作业。
7. Fruits and vegetables ______ _____ _____ you.
水果和蔬菜对你有益。
8. His parents _____ _____ _____ him.
他的父母对他要求非常严格。
9. ____ _____ him two hours to do the homework .
他花了两个小时做作业。
10. John has a lot of family rules.
_____ _____ Peter.
约翰家有许多家规,彼得家也是这样。

四. 选择填空:
1. I ______ to have a part-time job.
A. am not allow B. not allow
C. don't allow D. am not allowed
2. Sixteen-years-olds shouldn't ______ to go to an Internet bar.
A. be allowed B. be allow
C. allow D. are allowed
3. _____ middle school students allowed to use mobile phone at school ?
A. Do B. Did C. Are D. Can
4. Students _____ to use E-mail English in everyday writing.
A. may not B. can't
C. shouldn't D. shouldn't be allowed
5. I don't think teenagers should be allowed to drive , because they are _____.
A. not enough serious
B. not serious enough
C. too serious
D. to serious
6. Which of the following school rule is true.
A. students are allowed to make noise in the hallway.
B. students are allowed to wear their own clothes.
C. students are allowed to wear earrings
D. students are allowed to ask teachers questions in class.
7. I have to stay at home ______ school nights.
A. in B. at C. on D. for
8. Many students will be ______ if the class is boring.
A. sleep B. sleepy C. sleeping D. slept
9. -I think teenagers shouldn't be allowed to smoke.
-I agree ______ you.
A. with B. on C. about D. for
10. The National Day is coming , we'll have 7 days ______.
A. on B. off C. up D. down

五. 读写题
(A)Quick Work
Ted Robinson has been worried all the week . Last Tuesday he received a letter from the
local police . In the letter he was asked to call at the station . Ted wondered why he was
wanted by the police , but he went to the station yesterday and he is not worried at more.
At the station , he was told by a smiling policeman that his bicycle had been found . Five
days ago , the policeman told him , the bicycle was picked up in a small village four hundred
miles away . It is now being sent to his home by train.
Ted was most surprised when he heard the news . He was amused (感到有趣),too , because
he never expected (指望)the bicycle to be found . It was stolen twenty years ago when Ted
was a boy of fifteen.
Answer the questions :
1. What happened last Tuesday ?
______________________
2. What was he told at the station ?
______________________
3. What are the police doing with the bicycle ?
______________________
4. Why was he surprised and amused ?
______________________
5. How old was Ted when his bicycle was stolen ?
______________________

(B)The rich and the poor
The world is divided (分为)into two main parts . The difference is that one part is rich
and the other is poor . In the poor part , a lot of people never get enough to eat . In the
rich part , a lot of people eat too much . In one part , child starve (饿死)and in the other ,
a lot of people get fatter and fatter and have to go on diets (吃特别饮食), or do special
exercises in order to lose weight.
The poorer countries have special problems . Sometimes the land is too poor to grow
anything on . The land can be improved (改善), but a lot of things must be done first . The
people must be educated an water must be found.
But rich countries have problems , too . There are not always pleasant places to live in .
Sometimes the air is too dirty to breathe , and the rivers are too dirty to swim in or to take
water from . The roads are too crowded to drive along . Large numbers of people do not have
decent (象样的)housed to live in . Some things will have to be done about these problems .
The air and the river will have to be cleaned , and more houses will have to be built.
Answer the questions :
1. What's the difference between the two parts ?
___________________________
2. Do the poorer countries have many problems ? What for example ?
___________________________
3. Can anything be done about it ?
___________________________
4. What must be done , for example ?
___________________________
5. Can all this be done easily ?
___________________________



【试题答案】
被动语态专项练习:
一. 1-5 BCBAC 6-10 ACDBD
11-15 DBDAC 16-20 ABACD
二. 1. was sent 2. were grown , sold
3. will help 4. can be borrowed
5. was heard 6. saved , was saved
7. was sent for 8. are made , Does ...make
9. were bought 10. Is ...made
三. 2. The house was painted last month.
3. Three people were injured in the accident.
4. My bicycle was stolen a few days ago.
5. When was this bridge built.
6. Were you invited to the party last week ?
7. How were these windows broken ?
8. I wasn't woken up by the noise.
四. 2. Football is played in most ...
3. Why was the letter sent to ...
4. where cars are repaired
5. Where were you born ?
6. How many languages are spoken ...
7. ...but nothing was stolen.
8. When was the bicycle invented ?
五. 1. is cleaned 2. was given by
3. Can be spoken 4. has been learned
5. will be published
单元练习答案:
一. 单词分类:
指人:1 3 5 6 15
家规校规: 4 8 11 12 13
人物特点:2 7 9 10 14
二. 英英释义:1-c,2-b,3-a,4-e,5-d
三. 1. have / had , no opportunity
2. learn , from
3. at , present
4. got , noisy
5. concentrate on
6. got / gets , to
7. are , good
8. are , strict , with
9. It , took
10. So , does
四. 选择:1. D 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. B
6. D 7. C 8. B 9. A 10. B
五. (A)
1. Tom Robison received a letter from the local police.
2. He was told that his bicycle had been found.
3. It's now being sent to his home by train.
4. Because the bicycle was stolen twenty years ago . He never expected the bicycle to be
found.
5. He was only fifteen.
(B)
1. The difference is that one part is rich and the other is poor.
2. Yes , they do , They have many special problems.
3. Yes , land can be improved , but a lot of things must be done first.
4. The people , for example , must be educated and water must be found.
5. No , it can't be done easily.

Unit 4 Reading The history of basketball
 
一、教学内容:
本篇文章重点单词和词组:
invent 发明 inventor发明者,发明家 court球场
factory工厂 challenge向...挑战 indoors在室内
hard硬的 wooden木质的 touch接触、碰撞
hoop篮圈 basket篮 balcony看座、看台
divide 分、分开 backboard篮板 replace替代、替换
compete竞争、对抗 earn挣得
NBA(National Basketball Association )全美篮球协会
increase增加,增长 separate 分、分开
non-contact sport互不接触的运动
divide into 把...分成 in history在历史上
stop ... from ...阻止 be replaced by 被...取代
much more 更加,更不用说
课文大意:
请大家看一下练习题的第二道,从这个题我们可以了解到文章的大意,即篮球发展的历史过程:
In 1861 , basketball's inventor was born.
In 1891 , the first game of basketball was played.
In 1936 , basketball became an Olympic event.
Since 1949 , basketball courts have been seen everywhere in factories , schools , and even
houses in China.

二. 重点、难点:
1. China is a large country with many different and interesting ways of doing things.
with在这里表情况
在中国这样一个大国里,各种不同的做事方式无奇不有
2. But people who travel around China can always see one thing that is the same everywhere
basketball.
在本句中出现了两个定语从句
(1)Who travel around China
(2)that is the same everywhere
分别修饰people 和one thing
翻译时应把定语从句放在所修饰词的前面
但在中国旅游的人总能看到一样东西各处都是一样的--篮球
3. This much - loved sport is enjoyed by men and women , and by young and old.
(1)much - loved为合成词,深受人喜爱的,是个形容词
类似的词有kind-hearted热心肠的warm-hearted
near-sighted近视眼的
three-legged 三条腿的
(2)be enjoyed by为被动语态,应译为"被...喜爱的,深受...喜爱的"
(3)young 和old在这里被用作名词,应译为年轻人和老人
这项运动深受男女老幼的喜爱
4. The sport of basketball is a little over a hundred years old.
a little over应译为稍多于
5. Since 1949 , basketball courts have been seen everywhere.
have been seen 是现在完成时被动语态
它的构成为主语+have / has / been +过去分词
自从1949年,篮球场已经在中国的工厂,学校甚至家庭中随处可见。
6. Millions of people play the sport for fun and exercise , but few people know how
basketball started.
(1)million
当我们说一百万、两百万、三百万...时,million不变复数
one / a million , 2 million 3 million
而说"数以百万计"的,million 应变复数 millions of
(2)few 几乎没有
few+可数名词
上百万的人出于娱乐和锻炼的目的打篮球,但很少有人知道篮球的起源
7. Basketball was invented by a Canadian doctor.
was invented by 是一般过去时的被动语态,应译成被发明
其句式是主语+was / were +过去分词+by短语
8. his teacher challenged the class to invent a new game challenge
(1)n. 名词,挑战 It's really a challenge for me.
这对我来说确实是个挑战。
(2)v. 动词=ask someone to do something different , challenge sb to a game of tennis.
要求某人参加网球比赛
She challenged the newspaper to prove its story.
她要求这家报纸证实报道的真实性
9. the teacher wanted a game that people could play indoors.
(1)indoor形容词,在室内进行或放置的,适用于室内的
indoor games , activities 室内游戏、活动
(2)indoors 副词,在室内,往室内
go / stay indoors 进/留在屋内
10. But he wanted the game to be a non-contact sport because it would be played on hard
wooden floors
would be played 为过去将来时被动语态
其构成为would + be + 过去分词
11. If people touched , they could fall down and get hurt .
如果人们互相接触的话,他们就会摔倒并且受伤。
get hurt 也可以说be hurt , get为系动词,hurt为过去分词
12. He put them high on the balcony where people sat looking down at the players
他把它们(篮筐)放在比较高的位置,这样人们(观众)就可以坐在看台上俯视篮球运动员了。
(1)Where people sat looking down at the players.
这部分为定语从句,修饰前面的balcony.
(2)looking down 为现在分词,表伴随的动作
(3)balcony此处为"看台",此外,它还有"阳台"的含义。
13. He divided them into two teams of nine and taught them how to play his new game.
他把他们(18人)分成9人的两队,然后教他们如何做这个新游戏
divide into 是个词组意为"分成"
If you divide 6 into 30 / divide 30 by 6 ,
the answer is 5.
以6除30,答案为5。
The teacher divide the students into 2 parts.
老师把同学们分成两部分
14. They played the first basketball game in history .
in history是个词组,意为"在历史上"
15. The backboards behind the baskets were added to stop people in the balcony from trying
to catch the ball
(1)stop sb from doing 阻止某人做某事
Can you stop the child from getting into mischief ?
你不能制止那个孩子恶作剧吗?
What can stop us from going if we want to go ?
如果我们要去,什么能阻止我们不能成行呢?
(2)were added 为被动语态,"被加进去"
整句应译为:篮筐后面的篮板被加了进来,以防止看台上的观众接住球
16. Later , the baskets were replaced by net.
be replaced by 被...代替
后来,篮子被篮网代替了。
17. For many years , Americans were the most famous basketball players , but the sport is
much more international.
多年以来,美国人一直以篮球著称于世,但这项运动更是一场国际化的运动。
much more 是个词组,意为更加,更不用说
如:It's difficult to understand his books , much more his lectures.
他的书难懂,它的演讲就更难懂了。
18. Many top players from around the world earn big money playing in America's NBA.
很多顶尖的运动员通过在美国NBA中打球挣大钱。
(1)top players 顶尖运动员,我们还可以说top students.
(2)playing ...为现在分词作状语表方式
课文结构分析:
本篇文章共6段(6 paragraphs)
1段和2段应为一部分The situation in China. 中国的情况
(1)Basketball is enjoyed by men and women , and by young and old.
(2)Few people know how basketball started
3段和4段应为一部分
How was basketball invented.
篮球是怎样被发明的。
5段6段为一部分
The development of basketball . 篮球的发展。
(1)In 1936 , basketball became an Olympic event.
(2)It's an international sport.

(二)主观判断题
中考"阅读理解"题不仅要求考生读懂一个个的句子,而且要求能理解这些句子之间的内在联系。有的
试题要求根据中学生必须具有的一般常识,对所读的短文进行一定程度的推断;有的试题还要求了解其内在
的逻辑关系,从而对所读的内容形成更深入的理解。一般来说,这类问题都不可能直接从原文中找到答案,
必须根据原文提供的有关信息,进行合理的推理和判断才能回答。完成主观判断题通常应注意以下五点:
1. 运用常识,合理判断。例如:
2001年北京海淀区中考"阅读理解"题原文(A)中有这样的内容:
One day we invited some friends to dinner . When it was about six o'clock , my wife found
that we had little bread . So she asked our five-year-old daughter , Kathy , to buy some . 针
对这段话,有如下一个问题:
One day Kathy's parents invited some friends to _______.
A. have breakfast B. have lunch
C. have supper D. have a party
[解题指导]从短文中不难看出:文中的"we"就是问题中的"Kathy's parents"。原文中提到"请
客吃饭"(we invited some friends to dinner),但是,在早(breakfast),午(lunch),晚
(supper)三餐中,却未明确指出到底吃哪一个。英语中"dinner"的词义是main meal of the day .
whether eaten at midday or in the evening 。一般译为"正餐",即:一日间的主餐,而且,中午或晚
上吃均可。下文谈到:When it was about six o'clock , my wife found that we had little bread.
显然,快六点(about six o'clock)了,主人还未准备就绪。这里的"six o'clock",合理的解释无疑
是下午六点。因此,根据一般人"一日三餐"的基本常识,他们请客吃饭的只能是晚饭,故正确答案为:C.
have supper。
2. 根据情景,进行猜测。例如:
2001年福州中考"阅读理解"题中有这样一段话:
People are often killed while crossing the road . Most of them are old people and children .
Old people are often killed because they usually can't see or hear very well . Children are
often killed because they are careless.
句子中的"careless"是生词,因此,针对这一生词,设计了如下一道题,涉及词义猜测:The word
"careless"means ______.
A. careful B. not careful
C. take care D. more careful
中考"阅读理解"题中的"词义猜测",并不要求考生根据构词法去分析单词的词义,而是要求考生根
据有关信息对生词的词义进行推断性的猜测。上文指出:老年人过街死于车祸是因为"耳不聪,目不明"
(Old people are often killed because they usually can't see or hear very well. ),那么,小
孩子过街死于车祸的原因是什么呢?当然,不可能是"小心谨慎"(careful , take care),也不会是
"更小心谨慎"(more careful),只可能是careful的反义词"not careful"。因此,careless的词义是
not careful(粗心大意)便显而易见。可见,这种词义猜测也是建立在对上下文的正确理解之上的。
3. 利用信息,举一反三。例如:
2001四川省中考"阅读理解"题短文(A)中有这样两段话:
Most English people have three names : a first name , a middle name and the family name .
For example , my full name is Jim Allan Green . Green is my family name . My parents gave me
both of my other names.
People don't often use their middle names very much . So "John Henry Brown"is usually
called "John Brown".
该短文谈到英国和美国人的姓氏规律。短文最后有如下一个问题:
If your American friend's name is Lucy Smith , _______.
A. Lucy is her family name
B. Smith is her family name
C. Smith is her given name
[解题指导]
由于国情不同,英美人的姓名与我们中国人的姓氏规律是不同的。我们中国人的姓名是姓在前,"名"
在后。短文中对英国人的姓氏规律提供了如下信息:Jim Allan Green 如果是全名(full name)的话,
Green是"姓"(Green is my family name. ), Jim Allan 则相当于中国人的"名"(My parents gave
me both of my other names. )。同时,英国人不常用中间那个名字(People don't often use their
middle names very much. )因此,一般叫作"John Brown"。当然,其中的"Brown"仍为"姓"
(family name)。
此题中的美国朋友被称为Lucy Smith ,根据"John Henry Brown"可以化简为"John Brown",
"Brown"仍为"姓"(family name)这个信息,举一反三,不难看出"Lucy Smith"中的"Smith"是这
位美国朋友的"姓"(family name)。故此题的答案为:B. Smith is her family name。

4. 纵观全文,概括大意。例如:
2000年广州中考"阅读理解"短文(A)谈到大海中的鲨鱼,文后有这样一道题:
This passage is about ______.
A. what a shark is
B. the best place to swim in
C. how to swim safely
D. how to ride on sharks
解答这类题的关键在于找出主题句。一般来说,一篇文章中暗示主题的句子通常在文章的第一段或最后
一段。但要注意,对这类题目的解答不能停留在对原文中某个词语或句子理解的水平上,而必须对文章的有
关信息或全部信息进行必要的加工、处理,进而达到语篇水平上的理解才能正确选择,切忌以点代面,以偏
概全。
首先,不妨观察此文第一段:
A shark is a large , fierce fish . What will you do if you meet a shark while you are
swimming ? One man who knows all about sharks has given some rules to help you swim safely.
尽管此文谈到鲨鱼许多方面的生活习性,但是,其出发点是通过了解鲨鱼的生活习性,告诫人们游泳时
如何保护自己。比较该文前几段的第一句:
Don't swim in waters where there are sharks.
If you see a shark , swim slowly for the shore.
If Mr. Shark comes too close , put your head under water.
But what to do if he still keeps coming after you ?
[解题指导]显然,纵观全文,不难看出,答案:C. how to swim safely. 比其它选择项更能概括全
文的大意。如果抓住短文中的只言片语,就把它确定为一篇文章的主题,则难免偏离主题,犯"以偏概全"
的错误。
5. 深入理解,符合逻辑。例如:
2000年四川"阅读理解"短文题(I)的故事性很强。该短文讲述某地地震期间,为保证安全,父母决
定把孩子Johnny送到伯父Peter家。伯父同意了,但是强调"but I'm not used to children . I live a
very quiet and peaceful life. "两天后,Peter发来电报:电文是:"Am returning child . Please
send earthquake. "不妨译为:小孩送回,宁愿地震。显然这份电报确实令人费解。
短文后有如下一个问题:
Which of the following is true ?
A. Peter felt very happy when Johnny lived with him.
B. Peter didn't like to live with a child like Johnny.
C. Johnny was a bad boy.
[解题指导]短文提到了地震的危害(Many houses were broken. ),而且,也估计到下一次地震的
危害更大(The second earthquake would be worse than the first. )。既然如此,Peter还要"Please
send earthquake"(宁愿地震),说明小孩Johnny 在家的表现比发生地震还可怕。也从另一个角度说明
Peter强调的"I'm not used to children. "(我不习惯带小孩)也非同寻常。可见,选择B. Peter
didn't like to live with a child like Johnny (不喜欢和这样的孩子一起生活)是恰如其分的。
设计这类需要逻辑推理的试题时,一般来说,作者在短文中总是会转弯抹角,有目的地使用某些词语来
暗示自己的观点。上文提到的"Am returning child . Please send earthquake. "便是一例。在做这类
题时,同学们必须依据文章提供的这些信息,进行分析、推理、判断,从而得出答案。但是推理一定要符合
逻辑,做到言之有据,言之有理。

【模拟试题】
一. 根据课文内容判断正误(True or False)
1. Basketball was invented in 1861. ( )
2. Basketball is a non-contact sport. ( )
3. Naismith added backboards behind the baskets to help the players put the ball in the
baskets. ( )
4. A basketball team from China competed in the Berlin Olympic in 1936. ( )
5. Chinese basketball players began to play in NBA. ( )
6. Each team has 6 players at the beginning( )

二. 用所给动词的适当形式填空:
Basketball is an international sport . It 1 (play)by more than 100 million people in
208 countries . It 2 (enjoy)by men and women , and by young and old . But few people
know the history of basketball .
It 3 (invent)by Naismith , a Canadian doctor He 4 two fruit baskets as basket
hoops , and 5 (put)them high on the balcony.
Later , the baskets 6 (replace)by nets and backboards 7 (add)to stop people in
the balcony from trying to catch the ball.
In 1891 , the first basketball game 8 (play)in history . In 1936 , basketball 9
(become)an Olympic event.

三. 阅读理解:
Basketball is still a young game . It's over a hundred years old . In the winter of 1891 ,
a certain college was having some trouble with its boy students . The weather was bad and the
students had to stay indoors . As they couldn't play outdoors , they were unhappy , and some
even got into fights from time to time.
Some of the teachers , at the college asked Dr. Naismith to invent a game so that the
students might have something to play with . It was not easy to invent such a game because it
had to be played indoors , and the court was not very large.
Dr. Naismith thought for a few days and invented a kind of ball game . It was a fast ,
wonderful game with much moving and passing of the ball . It was played between two teams . To
make a score , the ball had to be thrown into the basket ten feet above the floor on the wall .
At each end of the court there was such a basket . At first , Dr. Naismith wanted to throw the
ball into a box . As he could not find boxes of the right size , he had to use fruit baskets
instead . That is how the game got its name.
根据短文选择最佳答案。
1. How long is it since basketball was invented ?
A. 1000 years
B. Less than 100 years
C. 1100 years
D. More than 100 years
2. The students felt unhappy because _______.
A. they couldn't play outdoors
B. they often got into fights
C. they had much homework to do
D. they had little time to study
3. Who asked Dr. Naismith to invent a game ?
A. Some students
B. Some teachers
C. Some students' parents
D. Some of his friends
4. When a student ______- , he makes a score.
A. receives the ball.
B. throws the ball to another student
C. runs quickly with the ball in his hand
D. throws the ball into the basket

四. 读与写:
The Birth of American Football
A hundred years ago , the game we now call football did not exist . American football
started during a game between two colleges . The teams had gotten together to play what they
called "football", but each team played by different rules . One team played what we now
call soccer (英式足球). The other played what we now call rugby (橄榄球)
Both games had been invented a thousand years before . In the first kind of football game
ever played , all the men from one village tried to kick a ball into another village . The men
of the second village tried to kick the ball into the first . Hundreds of people joined in
running everywhere , ruining (毁坏)crops and knocking down fences . In time , people agreed
on some rules to keep order , but many rules were left open to change . Different rules
developed in different places .
When the two colleges met to play football , each followed its own rules . They mixed the
games together and invented a new game . A hundred years later we call that game American
football.
In what ways do you suppose the games we know now will have changed in another hundred
years ?
1. Finish the following sentences with the given words . 用所给词完成下列句子。
ago , before , later , during , between
(1)My grandfather died five years __________
(2)My grandmother had already died three years _______ (that)
(3)What's the difference _________ soccer and rugby ?
(4)They lived abroad _______ the war.
(5)You go first , and I'll come five minutes _______.

2. (1)Do you like sports ? Write down the reason.
_______________________________
(2)What's your favourite kind of sport ? Why do you like it ?
_________________________________
3. 运用你的想象力,再过100年之后,英式足球会变成什么样。
(使用一般将来时)
Use your imagination , what will soccer be like in 100 years ?
_________________________________________________________________
【试题答案】
一. 1. (F) 2. (T) 3. (F) 4. (T)
5. (T) 6. (F)
二. 1. is played 2. is enjoyed 3. was invented 4. used
5. put 6. were replaced by
7. were added 8. was played 9. became
三. 1. D 2. A 3. B 4. D
四. 1. (1)ago(2)before that(3)between(4)during(5)later
2. (1)Yes , I do. I play it for fun and exercise.
(2)My favorite kind of sport is basketball , I like it because it is very exciting
and basketball players are energetic and cool.
3. I think soccer will change a lot in the future .
There will be more players on the court and the time will be longer . And the judge will
be replaced by a computer or a robot . Maybe the ball won't be round . People will be more
interested in soccer . And the tickets will be more expensive.

Unit 4 What would you do ?

(一)(学习目标)Language Goals
1. Talk about imaginary situations. (谈论一些假设的、虚拟的情况。)
2. Hypothetical Conditionals. (初步学习虚拟语气)
3. Give some advice with the target language. (使用虚拟句提出建议)

(二)语言结构(Language Structures)
1. 虚拟语气(掌握与现在事实相反或与将来事实相反的虚拟条件句)

(三)目标语言(Target Language)
1. If I were you , I'd wear a shirt and tie.
如果我是你,我就会穿衬衫打领带。
2. If I were you , I'd take an umbrella.
如果我是你,我就带把伞。
3. What would you do if you won a million dollars ?
如果你赚了一百万美元,你会做什么?
4. What if I don't know anyone ?
如果我一个人也不认识怎么办?
5. You should eat lots of fruits and vegetable and drink lots of water.
你应该吃大量水果、蔬菜,大量喝水。
6. What are you like ? I think I'm outgoing.
你的性格如何?我想我很外向。

(四)Key phrases (重点词组)
1. won the lottery 赢得抽奖
2. in public 公共的、公众的
3. in the slightest 一点也;根本
4. plenty of 很多的、足够的
5. get along with 与...相处
6. let ...down 使...失望、沮丧
7. come up with 提出、想出(问题)
8. medical research 医学研究
9. what if 如果...怎么办
10. be late for 迟到...
11. be nervous 紧张的
12. get nervous (变得)紧张的
13. take a long walk 散步
14. ask one's permission 征求某人的许可
15. without permission 没得到许可
16. introduce oneself 自我介绍
17. rather than 而不是
18. a circle of good friends 朋友圈子

(五)语法重点(Grammar Focus)
虚拟语气
1. 语气就是我们常说的说话人说话的口气。
在汉语中,语气是由说话人说话的语调、情节等等表现出来的,动词没有任何变化。而在英语中,除了
语调之外,最主要的是动词发生变化而表示不同的语气。
在英语中语气分为三类:陈述语气、祈使语气、虚拟语气。
2. 虚拟语气:如果我们所说的不是事实,也不是要求、命令、劝告等,而只是一种假设、愿望、建议或
是一种实现不了的空想就用虚拟语气。
3. 虚拟语气常用在条件句中,及其他一些从句中。
注意:条件句分两种,真实条件句和虚拟条件句。只有在虚拟(非真实)条件句中,才用虚拟语气,而
在真实条件句中,要用陈述语气。
请比较:
(1)If it is sunny tomorrow , we'll go to the zoo.
如果明天天气好,我们将会去公园。在这句话中,明天天气好是完全有可能实现的,并非虚拟、幻想,
因此是真实条件句。在本句中,适用"主将从现。"
(2)If I were you , I would go at once.
(如果我是你的话,我立刻就走。)在这句话中,条件句,"如果我是你",但事实上,我不可能成为
你,这只是假设的情况,没有实现的可能。当条件实现的可能性很小,甚至可以说没有时,就需要用虚拟语
气来表示,动词发生了变化。

4. 在虚拟语气中,句子动词的时态比真实条件句中的时态后退一步
即:
现在时→过去时(该用现在时时,用过去时)
过去时→过去完成时(该用过去时时,用过去完成时)
将来时→过去将来时(该用将来时时,用过去将来时)
过去将来时→过去将来完成时(该用过去将来时时,用过去将来完成时)
在这一单元中,我们只要求初步接触虚拟语气的用法及结构,学习表示与现在事实相反的情况下如何体
现虚拟语气。

5. "表示与现在事实相反的情况"的虚拟语气
请看例句:
If I were you , I would take a small present.
如果我是你的话,我就带上一个小礼物。
(注:在这个句子中,即"If I were you 中,一定用were ,而不能用was")
(这句话中,是与现在的事实相反,"现在如果我是你的话。"事实上,我不可能成为你,也就根本没
有实现的可能)
请大家注意主句与条件从句中动词时态的变化。
形式:
从句(用过去时) 主句(用过去将来时) If +主语+ 主语+ 注:虚拟语气中的were 除了在If I were you 的结构中不能改动外,其它情况下有时可用was。
又如:
If I won a million dollars , I'd give it to charities.
如果我赢了一百万英镑,我要捐给慈善机构。
(在此句中,If条件句中,动词用过去式won,主句则用should / would 加动词原形。现实情况是我没
赢一百万英镑;虚拟的情况是假如我赢了一百万,这种虚拟是不可能变成现实的,因此用虚拟语气。)

6. 虚拟语气的疑问式,除了动词相应的变化外,其他变化与陈述语气相同
如:
(1)What would you do if you were in the lion's cage ?
如果你在狮子笼里,你会怎么做?
(疑问词在句首,主句中助动词提前,从句跟在主句后面。)
If I were in the lion's cage , I'd call for help.
如果我在狮子笼里,我会大呼救命。
If I were in the lion's cage . I'd get out fast.
如果我在狮子笼里,我会迅速出来。
(2)What would you do if you won the lottery ?
如果你赢了抽奖,你会做什么?
I'd give it to medical research.
我会用于医学研究。
Or I'd put it in the bank.
我会存到银行。
Or If I were a millionaire , I would buy a big house in the country.
如果我是百万富翁,我就在乡村买座大房子。
关于虚拟语气,我们要学习的东西还有许多,同学们会在今后的学习当中,慢慢接触到。

(六)Key points (疑难解析)
1.
bring的意思是把某人或某物"带来","拿来",强调方向,即从别处拿到说话人这儿来。
e.g. Next time you come , bring me that book , please.
下次你来的时候,把我的书带来。
take的意思是把人或物"带走,拿走",即从说话人这儿带到别处去。
e.g. Who has taken away today's newspaper ?
谁拿走了今天的报纸?
另外,相似的词还有get 和fetch ,表示到某地找到某人或某物并带回来,强调一去一回。
e.g. Go and get some water. 去弄点水来。
Can you fetch me some paper ?
你能给我取点纸吗?

2. He might not know anyone at the party.
他可能在晚会上谁也不认识。
might 的用法如下:
(1)是情态动词may的过去式
eg. He said that I might borrow his bike.
他说我可以借他的自行车。
(2)是may的虚拟语气形式,不表示过去,而表示现在或将来"可以,可能",但语气更委婉、客气,
有时表示对可能性有所怀疑。
e.g. a. Might I borrow your bike ?
我可能借你的自行车吗?
(语气比may更委婉)
b. He might come today .
今天他可能会来。
(对"他来"的可能性有所怀疑)

3. What if "如果...怎么办"、"即使...又有什么关系?"
这是一个固定搭配,引导带条件从句的疑问句。
eg. What if they don't come ?
他们不来怎么办呢?
What if I don't know anyone ?
如果我一个人也不认识,怎么办呢?

4. I get nervous before big parties.
在大的晚会之前,我会感到紧张。
get nervous 变得紧张,get是系动词,nervous 是形容词做表语。
又如:be nervous 或feel nervous 均可表达同样的含义。

5. in public 公共的、公开的
eg. Lily is very shy , and she is afraid to speak in public.
莉莉很害羞,她害怕在公众场合讲话。

6. ask one's permission 征求某人的同意。
without permission 没有得到许可。

7. introduce vt. 介绍
introduce sb to sb. 把(某人)介绍给(某人)
eg. It's my honor to introduce my teacher to everyone.
很荣幸,我把我的老师介绍给大家。
introduce oneself 自我介绍

8. Sometimes you might annoy people because you're so confident.
有时候,你可能会激怒别人,因为你太自信了。
9. You would also rather stay at home and read a good book than go to a party.
你可能宁愿呆在家里读书,也不愿去参加晚会。
rather ...than ...宁愿...也不...(注:than与形容词比较级无关)
rather , than 既可分开用,也可合在一起用,译成"而不是"
如:
(1)rather die than surrender 宁死不屈
(2)I , rather than you , should do the work .
该做这个工作的是我,而不是你。

10. in the slightest 根本,一点也
eg. Social situations don't bother you in the slightest.
社会环境根本影响(干扰)不了你。
11. plenty of 充足的、大量的
12. enjoy the company of other people. 享受他人的陪伴
13. a circle of good friends. 朋友圈子
14. let sb down 使(某人)失望、沮丧
15. come up with 提出问题

【模拟试题】
一. 写出下列词组
1. 一点也、根本不_________
2. 与...相处_________
3. 使...失望、沮丧_________
4. 如果...怎么办_________
5. 赢得抽奖_________
6. 变得紧张_________
7. 征求某人的许可_________
8. 宁可...也不..._________
9. 迟到_________
10. 公共的、公众的_________

二. 补充完整下面虚拟语气的句子,(注意区分主句与从句的位置变化)
1. I'd be a millionaire if __________________________
2. If I had more free time. __________________________
3. If I were you . __________________________
4. She would buy that if __________________________
5. If my house were on fire. __________________________
6. I'd travel around the world if __________________________
7. If I could change one thing about my life. __________________________
8. I wouldn't do that if __________________________
9. If I could make three wishes. __________________________
10. I would be a better student if __________________________

三. 根据不同情境,首先判断这个情景是真实可能发生的,还是虚拟的,然后填空。
Situation A
EXAMPLE : Gao is a doctor , but if he were (be)a truck driver, he would have (have)
very different skills.
(Gao不可能是个卡车司机,因此这个情境是虚拟的)
2. Gao's wife is a doctor , too , but she is planning to change her career . If she
_________ (change)her career , she ___________ (study)to become a lawyer.
Situation B
3. Antonieta is Brazilian , but she has lived in the United States and New Zealand , so she
speaks excellent English . If she __________ (stay)in Brazil , her English _________ (not)
(be)so good.
4. However , Antonieta _______ (speak)French too if she _________ (move)to France next
year.
Situation C
5. Mary's car is old . If it ________(break down), she ________ (buy)a new one.
6. Because Mary has a car , she has driven to school every day this term . But if she
_______ (not)(have)a car , she ________ (take)the bus.
Situation D
7. Marcia has applied to graduate school . She _______ (start)school next fall if she
_____(get)accepted.
8. When Marcia was twenty-one , she quit school for several years to get married and raise a
family . If she ________ (continue)her studies instead of raising a family , she _____
(begin)graduate school a long time ago.

四. 假设你现在在一个孤岛上,除了图中所示的物品,你一无所有,你该怎么办?完成下题。
Imagine you are on a desert island . You have nothing with you except these objects . What
would you do with them ?

If we were on a desert island , we would use this to
_______ . We would _______ with this
If we had this with us on the island , , we would use it to
___________ . With this , , we
_____________ . And finally , we _________ with this

五. 看图
What would you do if you were in prison ? At least 5 sentences .
假设你在监狱里,你做些什么?



【试题答案】
一. 1. in the slightest
2. get along with
3. let sb down
4. what if
5. won the lottery
6. get nervous
7. ask one's permission
8. rather ...than ...
9. be late for
10. in public
二. Answers will vary . 答案可多种多样,但必须符合虚拟语气的结构
eg. I'd be a millionaire if I won the lottery.
三. 2. changes ; will study (真实的)
3. had stayed ; would not be (虚拟)
4. will speak / moves (or would speak / moved)(真实或虚拟均可)
5. breaks down ; will buy (真实的)
6. did not have ; would take (虚拟的)
7. will start ; gets accepted (真实的)
8. had continued ; would have begun (虚拟)
四. The objects are knife , sock , fishhook , rope , plastic bags .
Answers will vary.
五. Answers will vary.

Unit 5
It must belong to Carla
  学习目标:
  表示对当前发生的事情做出推测和判断学会做出推测和判断。
  一、词汇
  author    作家
  toy      玩具
  picnic    野餐
  symphony   交响乐
  optometrist 验光师
  appointment 约会,约定
  algebra   数学,代数学
  crucial   关键的,致关重要的
  count    计,算
  chase    追逐,追赶
  garbage   垃圾
  pretend   装作

  二、词组
  1. belong to           属于
  2. hair band           发带
  3. because of           因为
  4. Chinese-English Dictionary 汉英词典
  5. Oxford University      牛津大学
  6. use up             用光、用完
  7. the only kid         独生子,唯一的孩子
  8. classical music        古典音乐
  9. make guesses         做出猜测
  10. outside our window      在窗子外面
  11. no more            不再
  12. escape from         逃离
  13. be careful of         留神、当心
  三、日常用语
  1. Whose volleyball is this?
    It must be Carla's. She loves volleyball.
  2. Whose French book is this?
    It could be Ali's. She studies French.
  3. Whose guitar is this?
    It might belong to Alice. She plays the guitar.
  4. Whose T-shirt is this?
    It can't be John's. It's much too small for him.
  四、知识讲解
  Section A:
  1. If you have any idea where it might be, please call me.
    If you have any idea... = If you know... 意为"如果你知道......"。
    any用于if引导的条件从句中,有"若干的,有多少"的意思。
    例如:
    If you have any time I'd like to talk with you.
    如果你有(些许)时间,我希望与你谈谈。
  2. no more 与not ...any more的区别
    二者都表示"不再","再没有"的含义但no more要用在谈数量或程度时,no more用在说时间时。
    例如:
    There is no more bread.
    没有面包了。(指数量)
    He's no more genius than I am.
    他和我都不是天才。(指程度)
    He doesn't live here any more.
    他不住在这里了。(指时间)
  3. I think I dropped it during the concert so it might still be in the symphony hall.
    during是介词,意为"在......期间",其后跟时间段。在引导时间状语时注意区分和for的用法。
    介词for引导时间状语时,很易和during混淆不清。它们的区别如下:
  (1)during用在已知的时期、节日或表示时间观念的名词之前。
     其后通常接the、this、that、these、those、my、your、his......等词。
    例如:
    during the last four days
    during the winter
    during that time
    during my holidays
    during our stay in Japan
    而for则用以表示"有限的"或"无限的"时间概念,通常其后接冠词、数词,复数名词或副词ever。
    例如:
    for the first time
    for two months
    for many years
    for years
    for ever
  (2)during的涵义是"当......之际"。
     它既可指某个动作在某个时期里连续不断地进行,也可以指某个动作在这段时期里的某个时间发生。
    例如:
    It snowed all day but stopped snowing during that night.
    下了一整天雪,到晚上才停了。
    而for的涵义是指某个动作在某个时期里处于连续不断的状态。
    例如:
    They worked for the whole day.
    他们干了一整天。
    在某些场合下,for含有"预先安排"或"为了某一目的"之涵义。
    表示此意味时,大都和come、go、stay、lend、rent、hire等词连用。
    例如:
    They will stay with us for the New Year.
    他们将和我们在一起,共度新年。
  Section B:
  (一)However, these days, strange things are happening in our neighbourhood and everyone is unhappy. 然而,最近在我们附近却在发生一些奇怪的事情,并且每个人都不高兴。
  1. however是一个转折连词,表示"然而,可是"的意思,与but的意义相同,但however是较正式的说法。
    例如:
    I know how to pronounce this English word, however I can't write it.
    我知道怎么读这个英语单词,但是我不知道怎么写。
  2. these days意为"最近,近来,近几天。"

  3. unhappy是happy的反义词。unhappy是一个合成词,由un+happy组合而成。
    我们常用的在词前加前缀变为其反义词的有:
前  缀 例  词 派生词 un-"不" happy unhappy like unlike grateful ungrateful friendly unfriendly lucky unlucky   (二)My parents called the police, but they can't find anything strange.
     我的父母亲报了警,但他们也没能发现奇怪的东西。
   (1)the police可以看作为复数名词,意思是"警察、警方"。
      但如果指一个警员,就要用a policeman或a policewoman。
   (2)can't在本句中,不表示"推断",而表示"能力"。
  (三)In my dream, I was swimming in an ocean of paper.
     在我的梦中,我浸泡在数不尽的试卷中。
    (in)an ocean of, 或(in)oceans of是介词短语,口语中常用,意为"极多的,用不尽的"。
     在of后接不可数名词或可数名词复数形式均可。
     例如:
     He thinks he has oceans of time.
     他认为他有用不尽的时间。
  语法:
  表示推测的情态动词。
  在英语中,表示对某件事物的确定程度,即表示推测的时候,我们通常会用到以下情态动词,must, might, could, may, can't, couldn't.
  一. can和could的区别和用法
  1.can表示体力和脑力方面的能力,或根据客观条件能做某种动作的"能力"。
    例如:
    Can you speak English?  
    What can I do for you?
    Can you make a cake?
    can用在否定句和疑问句中时有时表示说话人的 "猜测"或 "不肯定"。
    例如:
    Where can he be?
    Can the news be true?
   (在日常会话中,can可代替may表示"允许",may比较正式)
  2. could 是 can的过去式,表示过去有过的能力和可能性,还有怀疑和不肯定的意思(在否定和疑问句中)。
    例如:
    The doctor said he could help him.(能力)
    She couldn't skate when she was five years old.  (能力)
    At that time we thought the story could be true.(可能性)
    could用来提问,是有礼貌的请求 Could.... Please? 语气较为婉转。
    例如:
    Could I speak to Mr. Smith, please?
    Could you help us carry this box, please?
  二. 跟上组词一样, might也是may的过去式,其用法如下:
  1. may的用法:
  a. 表示"允许"或"请求"。
    例如:
    May I come in?
    在使用这一用法时需注意: may表示"允许"的否定形式是must not,意思是"不应该""不许可"。
    例如:
    -May I take this book out of the reading-room?
    -No,you mustn't.不行。
  b. 表示说话人的猜测,认为某一事情"或许"或"可能"发生。
    例如:
    He may know the answer.
    Tomorrow I may go shopping.
  c. may用在感叹句中可表示祝愿、愿望。
    例如:
    May you succeed.(祝你成功。)
    May you have a pleasant journey.(一路平安。)
  2. might的用法:
  a. might可以代替may,表示现在时间的动作,但语气较为婉转客气或更加不肯定。
    例如:
    He might not come today.
    Might I take a suggestion?
  b. might用来表示现在时间时,还可表示"规劝"。
    例如:
    You might pay more attention to spoken English.
  三. must与have to的区别
  have to比较强调客观需要,must着重说明主观看法。另外have to能用于更多时态,比较下面的句子:
  We had to be there at ten.我们得在十点钟到那里。
  We'll have to reconsider the whole thing.这一切我将不得不重新加以考虑。
  有时两者都可以用,意思差别不大。
  例如:
  We must have to leave now.我们得走了。
  must在表示说话人对事物的推测时候要注意它比may肯定得多,相当于汉语的"一定"或"准是"。(只有在肯定句中能这样用。)
  This must be your room.
  There must be a mistake.
  在回答由must引起的问题时,如果是否定的答复,不能用mustn't,而需要用needn't或don't have to,因为mustn't是"一定不要"的意思。
  例如:
  -Must we hand in our exercises today?
  -No,you needn't.
  must not的否定形式则表示"不应该"或"不许可",语气比较强烈。
  例如:
  You mustn't play on the road.
  You mustn't eat anything until you see the doctor.
  练习检测:
  一、单项选择
  1. --- Can you swim in the river?
    --- No, I _____.
  A. mustn't
  B. may not
  C. can't
  D. needn't
  2. --- May I go swimming now?
    --- No, you ______. You must finish your homework first.
  A. mustn't
  B. may not
  C. couldn't
  D. needn't
  3. --- Excuse me. Where is the zoo?
    --- Sorry, I don't know. Ask that policeman. He _____ know.
  A. shall
  B. may
  C. need
  D. would
  4. __________ I finish the work today?  No, you needn't.
  A. Must
  B. May
  C. Can
  D. Need
  5. --- Must I finish my homework now?
    --- No, you _________. You may have a rest first.
  A. mustn't
  B. can't
  C. may not
  D. needn't
  6. --- Tom, where is your father?
    --- I'm not sure. He_______ in his office.
  A. is
  B. may be
  C. maybe
  D. may
  7. ---______________I visit Lucy on Sunday, Mum?
    ---Yes, you______________.
  A. Must;can
  B. May;may
  C. Need;need
  D. May;need
  8. --- Where is Tom?
    --- He hasn't come to school today. I think he________ be ill.
  A. has to
  B. should
  C. may
  D. need
  9. --- Can you fly a kite?
    --- No, I _____.
  A. mustn't
  B. needn't
  C. can't
  D. couldn't
  10. This book _____ Lucy's. Look! Her name is on the book cover.
  A. must be
  B. may be
  C. can't be
  D. mustn't be
  二、填空
  用所给动词的正确形式填空。
  (1) --- Why isn't Jim here?
     --- He's busy. He   (take) care of his aunt's baby at home now.
  (2) --- What's Mr. Clarke going to do tomorrow?
     --- He'll go fishing if it   (not rain).
  (3) Linda   (make) a lot of friends since she came here last autumn.
  (4) --- Did Jack finish   (clean) the house this morning?
     --- Yes, he did.
  (5) --- Have you heard of the Great Wall, Mr. Read?
     --- Yes, I have. It's a place of great interest in China.
       It   (build) thousands of years ago.
  三、选择最佳答语补全对话
  Miss Wu : Can I help you?
  Li Gang : Yes, I'd like to return this book, please.
  Miss Wu : (1).
  Li Gang : No, I couldn't read it. I had a hard time reading a few pages, and then I decided to give up.
  Miss Wu : (2).
  Li Gang : It wasn't the language. It was the words. They are too small for me.
  Miss Wu : (3).What can I do for you then?
  Li Gang : Well, I'd be glad if you could find me another book.
  Miss Wu : (4).
  Li Gang : Yes, but one with bigger words.
  Miss Wu : (5).
  Li Gang : Oh, Oliver Twist. This one is fine. And the words are much bigger. Thank you very much.
  Miss Wu : You're welcome.

  A. What about this one?
  B. You can't keep the book for long.
  C. Another English storybook?
  D. Isn't it interesting?
  E. Oh? But I know you are good at English.
  F. Did you enjoy the book?
  G. Yes, they are really small.

  四、阅读理解
  Once Effendi had a joke with the Prime Minister (宰相). He said that the Minister would die the next day. The next day, the Minister fell to the ground from the horse and really died. When the king learned this, he got angry and sent his men to catch Effendi at once.
  When Effendi was brought to him, the king shouted angrily, "Effendi, since (既然) you knew when my Minister would die, you must know the date of your own death (死) . Say it out, or you'll die today."
  Effendi looked at the king for a while. Then he answered, "But how can I know? I'll die two days earlier than you."The king was afraid that if he killed Effendi, he himself would die after that. He thought he must keep Effendi alive (活着) as long as possible, so he let Effendi go.
  (1)This story tells us     .
  A. how Effendi fooled (愚弄) the king
  B. when the king would die
  C. why the Minister died
  D. Effendi knew the dates of everyone's death
  (2)The prime Minister died because     .
  A. Effendi killed him
  B. Effendi said he would die
  C. He was badly ill
  D. He fell of the horse
  (3)Why did the king ask Effendi to tell him the date of Effendi's own death?
  A. Because the king wanted to know when he himself would die.
  B. Because the wanted to find an excuse to kill Effendi.
  C. Because he himself had known the date of Effendi's death.
  D. Because he wanted to know when Effendi would die.
  (4)The king let Effendi go because     .
  A. he hoped to live a long life
  B. he was afraid of Effendi
  C. he didn't believe (相信) Effendi's words
  D. He knew he would die two days later
  (5)Which of the following is not true?
  A. Effendi played a joke on the Minister
  B. The king was afraid of death.
  C. Effendi didn't know when the king would die.
  D. If the king killed Effendi, he himself would die two days later.
  答案及解析
  一、
  1. 选C。问句中的can询问"能力"的问句意为"你能在河里游泳吗?"如果能,则答Yes, I can;如果不能,则答No, I can't此题选C。
  2. 选A。May开头的问句是"请求许可"的问句意为"我可以现在去游泳吗?"如果允许,答句是Yes, you may。如果不允许,答句是No, you can't。如果表示"强烈的"不允许,"决不能",则答句是No, you mustn't。此题意为"现在"你"决不能"去游泳,应该先完成作业。因此选A。
  3. 选B。此题考查学生对情态动词用法的掌握情况。题中的情景是问路,而被问者并不知道去公园的路,建议问路人去问警察,说警察可能知道。最后一句说的是一种可能性。
  4. 选A。考查情态动词must的用法。考生错解的原因在于没有掌握它的用法。
  5. 选D。此题考查知识点为情态动词must的用法。考生错解的原因在于没有掌握must引起的一般疑问句的否定回答。
  6. 选B。情态动词may后接动词原型"be",表示一种可能性或推测。
  7. 选B。此题考查情态动词的用法。may用于征求对方的意见。请注意may的这一用法。
  8. 选C。本题主要考查情态动词。汤姆今天没来上学,他可能是生病了,也有别的可能。所以只能是一种推测。故应选C。
  9. 选C。
  10. 选A。must be与may be 都表示推测,must be表示"一定是、准是";may be 表示"可能是",相比之下must be 的把握性更大些。
  二、
  (1)is taking
  (2)doesn't rain
  (3)has made
  (4)cleaning
  (5)was built
  三、
  (1)F,你喜欢吗?
  (2)E,哦?据我所知,你英语很棒!
  (3)G,是的,确实很小
  (4)C,还是英语故事书?(上文提到是英文书)
  (5)A,这本好吗?
  四、ADBAD

Unit 6
I like music that I can dance to.
  学习目标:
  1. 学会表达自己对某人或某物的喜爱和理由。
  2. 能对自己看过书和电影,听过的CD进行评述。
  一、词汇
  prefer      更喜欢
  lyric       歌词,抒情词句
  entertainment  乐趣,快乐
  feature      特点,特征
  photography   摄影,照相
  photographer   摄影师
  exhibition    展览,展览会
  gallery      美术馆,画廊
  energy      活力,力量
  double      双倍
  spoil       宠爱
  figure      统计数字
  二、词组
  1. sing along with    伴随...歌唱      
  2. go on vacation     继续度假
  3. all kinds of      各种各样的      
  4. prefer... to...    比...更喜欢...      
  5. be honest       诚实
  6. remind sb of sth   提醒某人某事     
  7. be important to sb  对...重要       
  8. be sure to do sth  肯定做某事      
  9. come and go      来来往往
  10. see sb do sth    看见某人做了某事    
  11. be lucky to do sth 很幸运... 
  12. on display 
  三、日常用语
  1. Rosa likes music that's quiet and gentle.
  2. --- What kind of music do you like?
    ---I like music that I can sing along with.
  3. --- What kind of singers do you love?
    --- I love singers who write their own music.
  4. ---Why do you like this CD?
    ---This music is great because you can dance to it.
  四、知识讲解
  Section A:
  1. I like music that I can sing along with. 我喜欢可以跟着唱歌的音乐。
    sing along with the music 和着音乐一起唱,类似的还有:
    dance to the music 伴随着音乐跳舞
  2. I prefer music that has great lyrics. 我比较喜欢歌词好的歌曲。
    prefer v. 更喜爱,更喜欢.相当于like very much. 具体用法如下:
  (1)prefer + n. (名词),例如:
  I prefer groups that play quiet and gentle songs.  我更喜欢演唱轻柔音乐的组合。
  Jennifer prefers musicians who write their own lyrics.
  (2)prefer to do sth 宁愿做某事,例如:
  I preferred to stay behind rather than go with you. 
  我宁愿留下来不愿和你们去。
  She preferred to write to him rather than telephone him.  
  她宁愿给他写信也不愿给他打电话。
  (3)prefer sth to sth 比...更喜欢..., (此句型中的to是介词,后接名词、代词或动名词) 相当于like A better than B.意为 "喜欢A,不喜欢B;宁愿A,不愿B" 使用这个句型,最重要的原则就是"前后一致",也就是说,prefer和to后面的部分,不论词性、形式都要相同。例如:
  I prefer fish to meat.   我喜欢鱼,而不喜欢肉。(prefer名词to名词)
  I prefer reading to playing.  我宁愿读书,不愿玩耍。(prefer动名词to动名词)
  -----Which would you prefer , coffee or milk ? 咖啡和牛奶,你喜欢哪一个?
  -------I prefer milk to coffee.  与咖啡相比,我更喜欢牛奶。
  He told me he preferred the country life to the city life. 
  他告诉我,和城市生活相比,他更喜欢乡村生活。
  3. The music reminds me of Brazilian dance music. 这支曲子让我想起了巴西舞曲。
    remind sb of sb / sth 提醒,使...记起...
    This picture reminds me of my childhood.  这张照片使我记起了我的童年。
  Section B:
  1、He's made some great movies over the years. 这些年来,他已经拍摄了多部精彩的影片。
  区分produce和make
  二者用作动词作"制造"、"生产"讲时,可互换使用。如:
  The factory makes / produces colour TV sets. (这个工厂生产彩电。)
  make为普通用语,意思为"做"、"建造"、"生产",主语多为人,有时也可能是生产物品的某个地点。如:
  She make a cake for us. (她给我们做了一个蛋糕。) (主语是人)
  The shop makes shoes. (这家店铺生产鞋子。) (主语是某个地点)
  produce为正式用语,意为"生产"、"产生"、"制造",其主语可以是人,也可以是物或某个地点。如:
  They produce over 250 cars a week. (他们每周生产250辆汽车。) (主语是人)
  The machine can produce music when you touch it.
  (当你触摸到这台机器时,它会放出音乐。) (主语是物)
  Canada produces high-quality wheat. (加拿大生产高品质的小麦。) (主语是某个地点)
  2、It does have a few good features, though. 然而它的确有些优点。
  does 在句中表强调,可写成 It has a few good features, though.
  though即可以作副词也可以作连词,在这里用作副词,放在句尾作连词用时,放在句首或句中, 但不能与but连用。
  语法:
  语从句
  这个句型是这单元我们重点接触的一个语法项目,你观察两个句子,看看有什么区别:
  一本有趣的书
  an interesting book         形容词interesting做定语修饰名词book
  a book that is interesting     that is interesting这个句子做定语修饰名词book
  interesting/that is interesting作用是相同的,都是用作定语来修饰名词book, 我们把这种在复合句中修饰名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。再如:
  一位漂亮的女孩
  a girl who is beautiful  从句做定语(girl是先行词)
  等于a beautiful girl  beautiful是形容词做定语
  一本有趣的书
  a book that is interesting 从句做定语(book是先行词)
  等于an interesting book 形容词做定语
  复合句中,修饰某一名词或代词的从句叫做定语从句。定语从句要跟在所修饰的名词或代词后面,被定语从句修饰的名词或代词叫做先行词。定语从句一般用关系代词who,that,which和whose来引导,放在从句的句首使从句与主句相连,并在句中担当一定的成分,关系代词如果在从句中作主语就要用主格,如果做宾语就要用宾格,如果做定语就要用所有格。
  I like music that I can dance to. 我喜欢可以随之跳舞的音乐。
  music作先行词,that I can dance to 是定语从句修饰music,其中,that是关系代词引导定语从句
  I prefer singers who can write their own songs. 我喜爱能自己写歌的歌星。
  singers作先行词,who can write their own songs 是定语从句修饰singers,其中,who是关系代词。
  定语从句是高中的一个重要语法项目,这里就各关系代词举例如下:
  That在从句中作主语或宾语(作宾语时that 可省略)指物
  1.A plane is a machine that can fly.          (作主语)
  2.The noodles (that) I cooked were delicious.    (作宾语)
  指人
  1.Who is the man that is reading the book over there?  (作主语)
  2.The girl (that) we say yesterday was Jim's sister.   (作宾语)
  Who / that 在定语从句中做主语时,  需要注意的是谓语动词的单复数应与先行词保持一致。例如:
  I like a sandwich that is really delicious.
  I love singers who are beautiful.
  I have a friend who plays sports.
  I prefer shoes that are cool.
  Which在从句中作主语或宾语(作宾语时可省略)  指物
  1.The silk which is produced in Hangzhou sells well.  (作主语)
  2.The songs (which) Liu Dehua sang were very popular. (作宾语)
  Who, whom在从句中分别作主语和宾语(若介词放在从句后面,则whom可以省略)指人
  1.The foreigner who visited our class yesterday is from Canada. (作主语)
  2.The boy  who break the window is called Roy.   (作主语)
  3.The person to whom you just talked is Mr Li.   (作宾语)
  4.Mrs White is the person to whom you should write.  (作宾语)
  Whose 在从句中作定语指人或物的所有格
  I like the girl whose hair is long.  (作定语)
  在以后的学习中大家还会学到更深层的内容。
  练习检测:
  一、单项选择
  (  )1. I like music that I can dance______.
  A. with
  B. to
  C. along
  D. on
  (  )2. Some of her best loved photos are _______ display in this exhibition.
  A. on 
  B. in 
  C. at
  D. about
  (  )3. There are many tall buildings on _______ sides of the street.
  A. each
  B. every
  C. both
  D. either
  (  )4. That is a watch of _______.
  A. his
  B. him
  C. my
  D. me
  (  )5. "Help _____ to some fish . "Mrs. Smith said to the children.
  A. you
  B. yourself
  C. yourselves
  D. yours
  (  )6. I _____ singing to dancing.
  A. like
  B. enjoy
  C. love
  D. prefer
  (  )7. He has a friend who _______ the piano very well.
  A. play
  B. playing
  C. plays
  D. played
  (  )8. We _____ here two hours ago. We _______ here for two hours.
  A. have arrived , have been
  B. have come , have been
  C. came , have come
  D. arrived , have been
  (  )9. Though it was late , ______ he went on with his work.
  A. but     B. and     C. so      D. \
  (  )10. We will have a ______ holiday after the exam.
  A. two month
  B. two - month
  C. two-months
  D. two months
  二、填空
  1. The man ______ is talking with my mother is my father.
  2. That book is the one ______ I bought yesterday.
  3. He is one of the workers _______ been saved in that accident.
  4. They talked of the things and persons _______ they remembered in the factory.
  5. All ______ can be done must be done.
  三、写作
  就你曾看过的书、电影以及听过的CD,写一篇评论。
  答案及解析
  一、
  1. B     2. A     3. C    4. A    5. C
  6. B     7. C     8. D    9. D    10. B
  二、
  1. who    2. that   3. who    4. that    5. that
  三、
A good film
  I've seen many films. But so far as I am concerned, the American film The Lion King is one of the best films I've ever seen. I enjoy it, not only because there are so many beautiful scenes in it, because it is really an instructive film.
  At the first sight of the little lion, A lovely creature, I was attracted by it. And at the same time, I couldn't help admiring the full imagination who created this wonderful film. With the development of the story, the pure little lion was cheated by his uncle, a wicked fellow, again and again. At first, his father, the lion king, was killed by his uncle. Fortunately, the little lion fled and began his new life with two new friends. Having experienced so much, the little lion grew up. He began to know the real meaning of responsibility. Finally he beat his uncle and became know the real meaning of responsibility. Finally he beat his uncle and became the new lion king like his father.
  I call it an instructive film because I think there is similarity between the little lion and our new generation. We haven't experienced much, so we lack experience. We always think highly of ourselves. But when in face of difficulty, we don't know how to deal with it.
  So this is a film that has the time-honoured moral that flowers in a green-house can't grow well in other places. Only after experiencing and overcoming difficulty can we really grow up.

Unit 3 Reading:That's cool
 
一、教学内容:
"That's cool. "这篇文章中提出了一些对cool的解释
Cool means a popular and successful life style.
"酷"意味着紧随流行的,成功的生活方式。
Cool means what they want to do and don't care if other people like it or not.
"酷"意味着做他们想做的事情不管其它人喜欢还是不喜欢。
Cool means new technology that make our lives easier.
"酷"意味着使我们的生活变得更轻松的新科技。
To realize your dream through great effort is really being cool.
通过艰苦的努力实现自己的梦想才是真正的"酷"。
Personality , independence , and freedom , all these things are cool.
个性、独立、自由这些才是酷。
Young people who can find their dream on their own are the ones who are really cool.
那些自己去实现梦想的人们才是真正的酷。
文中的前三个观点是针对于material things (物质上的东西)来说的,而后三个观点是针对于精神方
面去讲的,我们可以看出:
作者倾向于后三个观点,这也是"That's cool"的所指

二. 重点、难点:
1. the latest (means the most recent)最近的
She always dressed in the latest fashion.
她总是穿最新款时装。
His latest novel is a great success.
他最近出版的小说十分成功。
2. chat with 和...聊天
He often chats on line with strangers.
他经常在网上和陌生人聊天。
3. include包括
(第一段第3行)
Cool includes fun stuff , nice clothes...
The tour included a visit to the Science Museum.
旅游项目包括参观科学博物馆。
4. find out 经研究或询问获知
A recent survey on yahoo. com found out ...
Can you find out what time the train leaves ?
你能查问出火车什么时候开吗?
5. be cool by 通过...摆酷
Some students want to be cool by wearing jeans
一些同学想通过穿牛仔摆酷。
6. as well (as sb / sth )即、又、也
It's good that the young have their own ideas about life as well as being cool.
The child is lively as well as healthy.
这个孩子既健康、又活泼
当这个词组用在句尾时,应用as well
He likes playing football and basketball as well.
他喜欢踢足球,也喜欢打篮球。
7. It's natural for sb to do sth. 做...对某人来说很正常
It's natural these days for young people to want material things ...
这个句型其实是It's +形+for sb to do sth 的一种形式。it为形式主语,真正主语为不定式。
8. build ... on sth 把...建立在...上
Don't build your hope on his help.
不要把希望寄托在他的帮助上。
9. To realize your dream through great effort is really being cool.
这句话中,to realize 为不定式作主语
through意为"通过"此句话应译为:通过艰苦的努力来实现你的梦想才是真正的酷。
10. the same ...as ...和...一样
We watched the same movies as our parents.
I think the same as you do about the matter.
我对此事的看法和你一样。
same相同的、同一的
Don't make the same mistake again.
不要再犯同样的错误
all the same 还是仍然
Thank you all the same.
但还是谢谢你。
look the same. 看起来很像。
Tom and Jack look much the same because they are twins.
11. be proud of 对...感到骄傲,自豪
The young should be proud of their own culture.
They were proud of their success.
他们为自己的成功而骄傲。
be proud to do sth .
He is a famous person-I am proud to know him.
他是个名人--认识他我感到很荣幸。
12. value 重视
Youth today value personality ...
value 作名词时意为价值
value 作动词讲时意为重视某物(某人)
Do you value her as a friend ?
你把她当好朋友吗?
13. on one's own 独自,独立地
find their dreams on their own are the one's who are really cool.
I'm all on my own today.
今天我是独自一人。
She got the job on her own.
她的那份工作是靠自己得到的。
14. Other people are cool because they don't follow what everyone else does.
划线部分为宾语从句,follow意为"追随"
此句话应译为:其他人想通过我行我素来显酷。
15. For some people , new technology that makes our lives easier is cool.
本句中:that makes our lives easier 为定语从句,修饰technology , make ...easier
意为使...变得更简单
此句应译为:对于一些人来说,使我们的生活变得更简单的新科技是酷。
16. ...young people today show that they are cool with their personality.
此句中with应译为"用""借助于"
今天的年轻人借助于他们的个性来展示什么是"酷"
17. Instead , young people who can find their dream on their own are the ones who are really
cool.
本句中Who are really cool 是个定语从句
the ones是个代词,指前文中的young people
此句应译为:相反,那些能自己实现梦想的人才是真正的酷。
单词、词组总结:
material 物质的 life style 生活方式 include 包括 stuff要素
recent 最近的 equipment 装备 notebook computer 笔记本电脑
personal 个人的 digital 数字的 PDA 掌上电脑
tropical 热带的 island 岛屿 develop发展,使发达
developed country 发达国家 Matrix 《黑客帝国》 net 网
animation 动画片 technology技术
direction指导,指引 natural 自然的
effort 努力 value重视
independence 独立 freedom自由
normal 正常的
the latest 最新的 chat with 和...聊天
a recent survey of 最近的一次...的调查
find out 获知 be cool by doing 通过...摆酷
in fact 事实上 as well as 和,又
give direction 引导 It's natural ...for sb to 做...对...来说是很自然的事情
build ...on ...把...建立在...上
the same ...as ... 和...一样
be proud of 以...为骄傲/自豪
on one's own 独自,独立地

参考练习:
一. 根据中文完成英文句子。(用所学过的词组)
1. 她总是穿最新款的时装。
She always dresses in ______ ______ fashion.
2. Some students want to ______ ______ ______ dying their hair.
一些同学想通过染头发来摆酷。
3. You can go there by train _____ ______ _____ by plane.
你可以乘火车或飞机去那儿。
4. Can you finish the homework _____ ______ ______
你能独立完成作业吗?
5. I like _____ _____ movie _____ he does.
我和他喜欢同样的电影。
6. He often ______ _______ his grandmother on weekends.
他经常在周末和他父母聊天。
7. Don't _______ your hope _______ his help.
不要把你的希望建立在他的帮助上。
1. the latest 2. be cool by 3. as well as
4. on your own 5. the same as
6. chats with 7. build on

二. 阅读理解:
"Cool"is a word with many meanings . Its old meaning is used to express a temperature
that is a little bit cold. As the world has changed , the word has had many different
meanings.
"Cool"can be used to express feelings of interest in almost anything.
When you see a famous car in the street , maybe you will say , "It's cool. "You may
think , "He's so cool , "when you see your favorite footballer.
We all maximize the meaning of "cool". You can use it instead of many words such as
"new"or "surprising". Here's an interesting story we can use to show the way the word is
used . A teacher asked her students to write about the waterfall they had visited . On one
student's paper was just the one sentence , "It's so cool ."Maybe he thought it was the
best way to show what he saw and felt.
But the story also shows a scarcity of words. Without"cool", some people have no words
to show the same meaning . So it is quite important to keep some credibility . Can you think
of many other words that make your life as colourful as the word"cool"? I can . And I think
they are also very cool.
注:maximize扩大;waterfall瀑布;scarcity缺乏;credibility 可信性;suggests暗示
根据短文内容选择正确答案:
1. We know that the word "cool"has had ______.
A. only one meaning
B. no meanings
C. many different meanings
D. the same meaning
2. In the passage , the word "express"means "________".
A. see B. show
C. know D. feel
3. If you are _____ something , you may say , "It's cool."
A. interested in B. angry about
C. afraid of D. unhappy with
4. The writer takes an example to show he is _______ the way the word is used.
A. pleased with
B. strange to
C. worried about
D. careful with
5. In the passage , the writer suggests that the word "cool"______.
A. can be used instead of many words
B. usually means something interesting
C. can make your life colourful
D. may not be as cool as it seems
答案:
C B A C D

阅读理解要求:
生词不超过2%,每分钟50-60个词,理解正确率70%
题材:人物传记、寓言故事,活动记述,简单科普小品及部分应用文(信函、便条、简单表格和标志)
阅读理解题的考查内容
作为一种综合性很强的题目,阅读理解题主要考查以下几个方面的内容:
1. 考查文章的主旨和大意。
包括对文章主题的理解,对文章中心大意的理解,对作者意图或文章中人物观点的理解,以及从文章内
容中可推断出的结论和作者的弦外之音等。
2. 考查文章的细节和事实。
包括事实识别、有关数字方面的计算或识图、排列次序等。
3. 考查对文章中词语的意思或句子意义的理解。
这些词句一般不只是体现其表层涵义,而往往具有深层意义,同学们要根据文章的上下文来判断其意
义,或根据句子的语法关系分析,并挖掘其含义。
4. 考查拟选题目的能力。
文章标题的拟选不但取决于文章的内容,而且还取决于标题的特点。英语文章标题的特点一般是省略冠
词、be动词或作定语用的人称代词,且多以短语或简单句为主。选择标题的一般原则是:一要切题,即概括
出全文的主旨;二是要简洁,即文字要简单明了。

"阅读理解"的解题步骤与思路点拨
1. 浏览全文,捕捉信息。
要求同学们通过浏览全文,掌握其大意,了解作者的观点和写作意图。
2. 细读思考题,分析信息。
通读(浏览全文)短文后,已对文章或段落大意有所了解,再读思考题,对要捕捉的信息进行分析、推
理,这样便可先解答与主题思想有关的问题。然而浏览全文只能对大意有所了解,对于细节性的问题还得带
着问题通过复读方法解决。
3. 复读全文,抓住细节。
带着问题去复读,可缩小复读的范围,更便于捕捉关键的信息。复读时可边读边用铅笔做些标记,把有
关的人物、事件、时间、地点、起因(即5个W: who , what , when , where , why )划出来。例如:凡逢
人物就圈起来,看完一数,有几个圈就是几个人,一目了然。经过这样的处理,你对文章的内容和细节便清
楚了,对其中矛盾的产生、发展和解决心里就会有底了。
另外,在复读全文时,还应特别注意首段或每一自然段的首句,以及结尾句。因为短文的首句和首段往
往是作者要说明的对象或事件的起因;或作者阐述自己的观点;或事件发生的时间、地点与人物的联系。结
尾句、段是事件的结论或作者表达的态度、意图、目的等。这样一来便容易抓住中心,为准确、快速地解题
打下良好的基础。

4. 解答问题,选定答案。
对那些明显的,有把握的题可以断然圈定。遇到不会做的问题可暂时不做,把每个问题阅读完毕,等会
做的题已做完,然后再回头做剩下的题目。在做题时,如果遇到困难,再重新查阅。这次复读,要针对问题
的要求,抓住重点,一次求得正确答案。
5. 再读全文,核对答案。
这是最后一步,也是重要的一步,不能疏忽。这一步骤要用全文的主题思想统率各思考题,把我们在阅
读和答题时所得到的信息归纳整理一遍后重新再读一遍短文,检查答案,看是否前后一致;意义和语言知识
是否和原文相符;是否符合逻辑等。发现前后矛盾、遗漏要点等错误,要立即纠正。
值得一提的是,改正原来选定的答案,一定要慎之又慎。因为在做过一段时间题目之后,大脑已有些疲
劳,如果不慎可能会把本来选对的题目更改错。这也就要求同学们要相信自己的第一感觉,不可轻易改动答
案。一定要有充分的理由,脑海中有那么一种"柳暗花明又一村"的感觉或者觉得眼前一亮,有种豁然开朗
的境界,这才可改动答案,否则,十之八九会将本已做对的试题改错,下场后叫苦不迭,结果却于事无补。

做阅读理解题应注意的事项
1. 忌不带问题进行阅读。
做阅读理解题时,应先把文章后面所给的考查题浏览一遍,然后带着这些问题进行阅读。边阅读边选出
考查表层情况问题的答案,从而可大大提高阅读效率。
2. 忌草率行事。
在设计理解题时,设计者往往在四个选项中设置一个似是而非的答案。这样,答案的干扰性就特别强,
非常容易迷惑考生。如果在发现一个看似正确的答案时就草率定案,往往会掉进设计者设置的陷阱里。处理
的方法是:对所给四个备选答案进行分析、比较,在理解阅读材料内容的基础上进行旁敲侧击,去伪存真,
方可选出正确答案。
3. 忌凭主观印象。
少数阅读不明确的题目只需根据生活常识就可选出答案,而绝大多数试题则不然,考生必须忠实于原文
来选定答案。这就要求考生在做后一种测试题时,一定要排除自身的生活经验、经历和已有的知识等主观因
素的干扰,按照文章实际反映的情况来选择答案,切不可想当然。
4. 忌囫囵定案。
所谓囫囵定案是指考生在未完全读懂文章时就匆忙将答案选定,结果往往会选错答案,等后来发现时再
作改动,结果弄得试卷非常不整洁,以致于影响自己的成绩。因此,对于尚未读懂的地方,如果时间允许的
话,一定要慢速多读几遍,仔细揣摩,直到弄个水落石出再定答案。
5. 忌忽略时间。
做阅读理解题时,要从整体上控制时间,时间的分配要根据文章的难易程度来决定。文中一两处没弄懂
的地方可以暂时放置起来,等把全部题目做完了,再回过头来处理。因为做完别的题目,自己的心情相对放
松了,这时往往会产生新的思路、新的灵感。即使做完试卷后所剩时间无几了,再把所剩下的题目猜测一下
也不晚,因为这时还有选对的可能性。

客观信息题与主观判断题例析
中考阅读理解题一般有两种层次的试题:一种是客观信息题,即从阅读材料中直接获取试题考查的要
点;另一种是主观信息题,即:试题的答案不能直接从原文中找到,必须经过推理和判断才能回答。显然,
第二种试题的难度一般大于第一种。下面就列举几种题型并举例分析其解题技巧。
(一)客观信息题
所谓"客观信息",是指在供"阅读理解"的短文中客观存在的事实。客观信息的答案一般都可以在原
文中找到。一般来说,应在短文中找出相关信息的位置,确定试题测试的考点。当然,有的试题还得对原文
所提供的事实"去伪存真",进行一定程度的比较,才能做出正确的选择。完成客观信息题应注意以下三
点:
1. 辨认事实,注意细节
2001年北京中考"阅读理解"题短文(A)中有这样一句话:
There would be a school party on Friday evening . The girls were talking about what they
were going to wear.
短文后设有如下一个问题:
On Friday evening there would be ______.
A. a school party
B. a school meeting
C. a sports meeting
D. a birthday party
[解题指导]此题的题干On Friday evening there would be _______. 如果与原文中叙述的事实:
There would be a school party on Friday evening. 相比较,可以说是"大同小异"。二者的差异仅是
词序不同。考生如果能正确理解原文中所叙述的事实,便不难看出空白处所缺少的正是A项:a school
party。
又如该短文叙述的另一个细节:
The party was held on Friday evening . Groups of students arrived . The music began . The
girls stood in a line on one side , and the boys on another side.
短文后有下面一个问题:What happened when the music began ? 与原文中叙述的细节The girls
stood in a line on one side , and the boys on another side. 相比较,选择项:D. The girls stood
on one side , and the boys on another side. 最为接近。答案中仅缺少短语"in a line"(站成一
列),显然,缺少这一短语,也不影响该事实的存在。

2. 同义转换,着重内涵
(1)词句同义。例如:
2000年广州中考"阅读理解"题短文(A)中有这样一句话:
If you see a shark , swim slowly for the shore.
针对这句话短文后有下面一个问题:
When a swimmer meets a shark , he should ______.
此题的答案是:B. swim slowly to the shore.
[解题指导]根据此题的答案,不难看出:原文中的条件句(If you see a shark)在问句中转换成了
时间状语从句(When a swimmer meets a shark),原文中主体的动作也由"see a shark",转换成了
"meet a shark",但是语意的内涵并未发生变化,属于同义句转换。其答案swim slowly to the shore与
原文中的swim slowly for the shore也完全同义。
(2)语段同义。例如:
2000年上海中考"阅读理解"题短文(A)中有这样两段话:
Sally was a college student . It was going to be her mother's birthday soon . She
wondered what she could buy her as a present.
After she had looked for half an hour , she came into a shop that was selling cheap
umbrellas , and decided to buy one , since her mother had lost her umbrella the month before.
短文之后有下面一道正误判断题:Sally wanted to buy an umbrella for her mother.
[解题指导]
尽管原文中没有"Sally wanted to buy an umbrella for her mother. "这句话。但是原文中提到:
Sally 的母亲快过生日了(It was going to be her mother's birthday soon. ),她很想为母亲买件礼
物(She wondered what she could buy her as a present. )。她后来发现商店卖伞(she came into a
shop that was selling umbrellas),而她母亲又需要一把雨伞(...her mother had lost her umbrella
the month before. )。上述两段话所表达的内容"Sally wanted to buy an umbrella for her mother.
"一语道破。显然,二者用语虽然各异,但内涵相同,所表达的意思完全吻合。

3. 把握数据,注意推算
中考"阅读理解"中的数据推算并不要求高深的数学知识。在有关数据推算的试题中,根据短文所提供
的数据进行必要的运算时所涉及的数学知识一般都比较简单,关键在于理解原文。例如:2000年南京中考
"阅读理解"短文B中有这样一道题涉及数据推算:
I won a prize for one of my paintings when I was fourteen . That may be why I went to an
art school four years later ... When I left school , I got some money . I hope to become a
full-time craftswoman.
短文后有如下一个问题:
When finishing school studies , the writer was about ______.
A. 14 B. 16 C. 18 D. 21
[解题指导]
原文中提到:作者(The writer)14岁时曾因绘画得奖(I won a prize for one of my paintings
when I was fourteen. ),四年之后进美术学校(I went to art school four years later)。不难算出
该生入校时的年龄为14+4=18(岁)。针对这段话,试卷所提出的问题是:作者毕业时(When finishing
school studies)的年龄是多少。尽管短文没有谈到这所美术学校的学制,但是作者毕业时的年龄一定大于
18岁,故干扰项A、B、C均应排除。于是,选择项D是唯一可选的。该校的学制为3年(18-21),也是完全
可能的。

【模拟试题】
A
"Where are you going to spend your holiday ? "Misha asked his friends when they were on
their way home from school.
"I don't know , "Victor said . "My father and mother have not yet decided . This
evening we are going to talk about it . "
"But I know , "Lena said , "We usually spend our holidays at the seaside . We enjoy
holidays at the Black Sea , we like to swim and sunburn and go on all kinds of interesting
excursions (短途旅行). "
"We also go to the seaside in summer , "Vera said , "but this year my parents decided
to spend our holidays in Moscow. "
"Oh , it's wonderful ! You'll see all the interesting places , exhibitions , museums
and parks there , "Misha said . "We were in Moscow last summer and we had a very good time
there. "
"And where are you going to spend your holidays this summer , Misha ? "Vera asked.
"I'll stay in town for a month and then I'll go to my uncle's . He lives in a small
village on the Don River. "
"Why don't you go there now ? It's so hot in town in summer. "
"Because my cousin Sasha is coming to spend her holidays with us . I'm so glad . We
didn't meet for a long time. "
"Why don't you ask me about my plan for the holidays ? "Slave asked.
"Tell us , please ! "all of them said at once.
"I have a cousin , too. She lives in Leningrad (列宁格勒), and she is coming to stay
with us this summer. "
"Then it's very good . Let's spend our time together . You and me , and our cousins ,
"Misha said.
"And me ! "said Kate , a girl from their class.
"A very good idea ! "Save said . "I like it very much . We'll go on excursions
together . We'll play games , and swim in the river , and go for a walk in the woods . I
think my parents will let us live in tents near the river. "
"I don't want to go to the Black Sea now , "Lena said suddenly . "I want to stay here
and spend my holidays with you . It's so nice to live in a tent near a river. "
"But it's nice to live at a seaside , too ! "Slave said.
"I'll write to you from Moscow , "Vera said . "I am so glad that I go to Moscow. I
want to see everything and I want to go everywhere. "
1. Vera would spend his holidays with his parents in _______.
A. town
B. Moscow
C. Leningrad
D. Black Sea
2. _____ would stay in town during the beginning of the holidays.
A. Misha B. Slave and Lena
C. Kate D. A,B,and C
3. Misha didn't go to his uncle's at last , because ______.
A. it was too hot there
B. his parents hadn't decided yet
C. his cousin was coming
D. he wanted to live in a tent near a river
4. In this passage , you can know ______ are girls.
A. Kate and Slave B. Misha and Sasha
C. Lena and Misha D. Sasha and Kate
5. Why did Lena decide not to go to the Black Sea ?
A. Because he didn't like it .
B. Because he wanted to go to Moscow.
C. Because he wanted to spend his holidays in a tent near a river with his friends.
D. Because he wanted to go to everywhere.

B
Hundreds of years ago , life was much harder than it is today . People didn't have modern
machines . There was no modern medicine , either.
Life today has brought new problems . One of the biggest is pollution . Water pollution
has made our rivers and lakes dirty . It kills our fish and pollutes our drinking water .
Noise pollution makes us talk louder and become angry more easily . Air pollution is the most
serious kind of pollution . It's bad to all living things in the world.
Cars , planes and factories all pollute our air every day . Sometimes the polluted air is
so thick that it is like a quilt over a city . This kind of quilt is called smog.
Many countries are making rules to fight pollution . Factories must now clean their water
before it is thrown away and they mustn't blow dirty smoke into the air.
We need to do many other things . We can put waste things in the dustbin and not throw it
on the ground . We can go to work by bus or with our friends in the same car. If there are
fewer people driving , there will be less pollution.
Rules are not enough . Every person must help to fight pollution.
6. Hundreds of years ago , life was much harder than it is today because ______.
A. there were not any modern machines
B. there was no modern medicine
C. there were not many people
D. both A and B
7. What is the biggest problem in today's life ?
A. Pollution B. Air pollution
C. Noise pollution D. Water pollution
8. The most serious kind of pollution is ______.
A. water pollution B. air pollution
C. noise pollution D. A, B and C
9. Factories must clean their water ______.
A. as they are thrown away
B. when they are thrown away
C. after it is thrown away
D. before it is thrown away
10. From the passage we know that ______.
A. a few years ago , there was no smog at all
B. today people don't have to talk to each other in a loud voice
C. we can drink water from the polluted rivers and lakes
D. people are making rules in order to fight pollution

C
On very cold winter days , a group of Japanese children travelled a long way and arrived
at a small island where nobody lived . After setting up a camp , they caught fish in the sea ,
and walked on the snow to find firewood ,wild fruit and fresh water . Then they made a fire to
do some cooking . They were not homeless children or modern Robinson . They were all pupils
from a primary school and campers of special "hardship camp. "
Every year primary and middle schools in Japan organize such camps to train the children'
s spirit (精神)of bearing (忍受)hardship . Such places as thick forests and far-off
mountains are often chosen as camp places.
The Japanese education circles (人士)usually think it necessary to give children chances
of suffering hardships . Children in Japan now may hardly find times of hardships , because of
the rapid growth of national economy (经济)and improvement in the people's living
conditions . The experts (专家)think that such hardship camps can help children learn to
live and develop in the struggle against nature in modern society.
It's said that such hardship camps are warmly accepted by both Japanese school children
and their parents.
11. Many Japanese children set up camps in far-off mountains or forests to _______.
A. be modern Robinson
B. suffer hardships
C. stay away from the troubles at home
D. enjoy travelling
12. Children in Japan now hardly find times of hardships because ______.
A. they have too much homework to do every day
B. their parents do most of the things for them
C. their living conditions are greatly improved
D. they don't go out often
13. It seems that hardship camps are _______ in Japan.
A. getting fewer and fewer
B. very popular
C. not necessary among the children
D. good to those who are homeless
14. What one group of children did on a small island would help them learn _______.
A. how to travel in places where nobody lived
B. about islands and seas
C. what to do at home after school
D. to live in the struggle against nature
15. What seems to be a problem to children in Japan today according to the passage ?
A. What to do at school.
B. Where to go to set up camps.
C. How to develop in modern society.
D. Whether to get children to go out.

D
Now satellites are helping to forecast the weather . They are in space , and they can
reach any part of the world . The satellites take pictures of atmosphere (大气). So the
scientists there can see the weather of any part of the world and tell how the weather will
change.
Today , nearly five hundred weather stations in sixty countries can receive satellite
pictures . When they receive the new pictures , they compare (比较)them with the earliest
ones . Perhaps they may find that the clouds have changed during the last few hours . This may
mean that the weather on the ground may soon change , too . In their next weather forecast ,they
can tell people about it .
So the weather satellites are of a great help to the scientists at the station . In the
past they could forecast the weather for about 24 or 48 hours earlier. Now they can make good
forecast for 3 or 5 days . Soon , perhaps , they may be able to forecast the weather for a
week or more ahead (提前).
16. The weather forms ______.
A. in any part of the world
B. in the atmosphere
C. in space
D. on the ground
17. Changing clouds in the atmosphere means ______.
A. a rainy day B. a windy day
C. that weather will change D. a sunny day
18. Without satellites , scientists could forecast the weather for ______ ahead.
A. a week or more B. 1 or 2 days
C. 3 or 5 days D. only 3 days
19. The main idea of this passage is that satellites are now used in ______.
A. taking pictures of atmosphere
B. many ways
C. receiving pictures of atmosphere
D. weather forecast
20. From this passage we know that satellites can ______.
A. only help us forecast the weather
B. do many kinds of work for us
C. only be used by scientists
D. always stay in space
 


【试题答案】
1-5 BDDDC 6-10 DABDD
11-15 BCBDC 16-20 BCBDB

Units 1-6复习(语言点)
I. 词组和习惯用语
Unit 1
pay for 付钱 come up with 提供,提出
think of 认为,想起 pick up 拾起,捡起
finish doing完成,做完 sooner or later迟早
encourage sb. to do sth. 鼓励...做... fill in 填写,装满
used to 过去常常 in the schoolyard 在校园里
on the shelf在架子上
Unit2
have a try 尝试 all over the world 全世界
be famous for 以...而著名
no matter 不管 give up 放弃
both...and... 和...都 ever since 从那时起,此后一直
come true 实现 set off 出发
step into 进入 slow down 减慢
a crowd of 一批 be proud of 以...而骄傲
so far 到现在为止 speak highly of 称赞(某人)
have / take ... off 休(多长时间的)假
Unit3
be afraid of 害怕 a piece of music 一首乐曲
protect the environment 保护环境 improve the environment 改善环境
as soon as 一...就... plant trees 种树
base on 以...为根据 do well in 在...做得好
all one's life 一生 cut down 砍倒
make a contribution to贡献给,捐献
Unit 4
as soon as possible 尽快 all kinds of 各种各样
keep doing sth. 一直做... fall / fast asleep (很快)入睡
wake up 醒来 hurry up 赶快
right now 现在
Unit 5
decide to do sth. 决定做某事 do by oneself 自己做
walk along 沿...走 the second largest 第二大
at the airport 在飞机场 go straight along 沿...笔直走
think about 考虑 have a good time 过得愉快
Unit 6
be amazed at 对...感兴趣 clear up 清除,收拾干净
encourage sb. to do sth鼓励某人做某事 take part in 参加
as long as长达,达...之久 thousands of 成千上万
stop doing sth. 停止做某事 on earth 在地球上
II.词义辨析
1. borrow / lend / keep
⑴ borrow: borrow sth. from sb.
May I borrow the history book from your sister?
⑵ lend: lend sth. to sb./lend sb sth
John lent me his new CD player yesterday.
⑶ keep
How long have you kept the book? For two weeks.
2. several / a little / a few / some / any
⑴ several: She has learnt several units by now.
⑵ a little: There is a little time left. Let's clean the classroom first.
⑶ a few: A few days later, they found the lost boy.
⑷ some / any: There are some oranges on the plate.
There isn't any bread in the bag.
Are there any apples on the table?
Please send him E-mail if you have any time.
Would you like some tea?
3. find / find out
⑴ find 发现
He found a wallet on way home and gave it to the police.
⑵ find out 找到
The teacher found out why he was late for school.
They find out a new method to work out the difficult math problem.
4. for / since
(1)谓语动词必须是延续性动词。
They have been here for ten minutes.
What have you done since 8 o'clock this morning?
(2)for 接表示一段时间的词、短语,since 接表示时刻的词、短语。
He has stayed there since 9 o'clock.
So he has stayed there for about eight hours.
(3)for 只能跟词、短语, since既可跟词、短语,又可接从句。
We have been good friends for five years.
We have been good friends since 1999.
We have been good friends since I came to this school.
(4)对for / since引导的时间状语从句提问时用how long
--How long have you worked there?
--Since 1998.
5. as soon as possible;意为"尽可能早地,尽快",多指时间短
Don't worry. I'll come as soon as possible.
(1)as quickly as possible;尽早(快),多指速度快
Please read the story as quickly as possible.
(2)as much as possible尽可能多地,多指数量。
We must practice peaking English as much as possible.
6. besides 除...以外,还有,包括后面的宾语
except;除...以外,不包括后面的宾语
except for有时可以与except互换
Besides English he is good at French.
We all pass the exam except Tom.
Except for my father ,we will all go boating.
7. because; because of 二者都作"因为","由于"解。
because作连词,后跟句子,是主句的直接原因。
because of是复合介词,后跟名词或代词,相当于名词词组。
He is not here today because he is ill.
The football match was put off because of the rain.
8. harm; hurt 均有"伤害"之意,但用法有区别。
harm使用较广,暗示产生"不良后果"。
hurt表示"伤害",暗示"肉体上的疼痛或精神上的不快"。
The noise of the machine harmed their hearing.
I'm sorry if I hurt your feelings.
9. search与look for
(1)search (sb./sth.)(for sb./sth.)搜查;细查以搜索某人;
search through sth. (for sth.)把......仔细搜索一遍。
The policeman searched him for drugs.
We searched through the drawers for the missing papers.
(2)look for 是寻找的意思,强调找的动作。
Are you still looking for a job?
10. pretty, beautiful, good-looking, handsome,
beautiful意为"漂亮悦人的",强调内在美和外在美的统一性,是表示"美丽"的最普通用语,语气
最强,不用于男性;
pretty只用于小孩、妇女和细小的东西,语气较弱;
good-looking指相貌好看的,语气弱,可修饰男性或女性;
handsome英俊的,潇洒的,主要用于男性。
11. check与examine
两词都有"检查,核对"的意思。
check(用检查或调查的方法)印证某事,核对;核实(不用于被动语态)
examine仔细观察;核查;调查;审查;诊察,测试
examine强调检查,测试,审问,而check强调在检查的基础上的印证,核对。
The doctor examined her patient carefully.
He must check his work more carefully. It's full of mistakes.
12. happen, take place, chance
happen发生,碰巧,指偶然性;
chance(是正式用语)发生,偶然发生=happen;
take place 发生,常指经过安排的。
I happened/chanced to be there when the accident happened.
Where will the 2006 World Cup Football Match take place?
13. surprise 与amaze
surprise表示由于突然而"吃惊、惊讶";
amaze表示造成心理上的混乱的吃惊,还表示"使惊叹",即对某种未料到的惊人之举感叹,赞佩,语
气比surprise强。
14. however与but
两者作"但是,然而"解,而且都引出并列句。
从语义上看,but所表示的是非常明显的对比,转折的意味较however强。
从语法上看,but是个并列连词,而however却是个连接副词。
从语序上看,but总是位于所引出来的分句之首,而however却可位于句首,句中,句末,但是译成汉语
时一定要把它放在分句之首。
15. because与since, as, for
这四个连词表示"因为,原因"的语气由强至弱依次为because--since--as--for.其中because,
since, as为从属连词。引导原因状语从句;for是并列连词,连接两个并列句。
because意为"因为",表示直接原因,回答why的提问,一般放在主句之后,可单独存在。
since意为"因为,既然",侧重主句,从句表示显然的或已知的理由。
as意为"由于,鉴于",主从句并重,从句说明原因,主句说明结果,为常用词。
for意为"因为,由于",表明附加或推断的理由,引导的分句前常有逗号,for分句不放在句首。
16. seem 与appear, as if
appear/seem意思是"显得,好像,似乎",都是不及物动词。一般不用于进行时态,通常用于以下两
种句型:
It appeared/seemed that he'd made a mistake.
He appeared/seemed to have made a mistake.
as if 用来引导方式状语从句,意思是"好像,似乎",它跟在描述行为举止的动词的后面,常见的
如:feel, seem, appear, smell, sound, taste等。
It seems / appears as if she's lost interest in her job.
17. alike 与like
alike是以a起首的形容词,只能做表语,而不能充当定语;而like却可以做介词或形容词,
作形容词的like既可以作表语,也可以作定语。
The twin brothers are very much alike.
The twin brothers is like that one very much.
注:alike也可用作副词,意为"同样地,相似地"。
She treats all the students alike.
【模拟试题】
一. 选择填空
( ) 1. Where is Li Ming?
He _____________ aboard.
A has B was C has gone D have been
( ) 2.She's never looked after a baby before, _______ she?
A isn't B hasn't C. has D is
( ) 3.His birth makes his family _________.
A happily B happy C happier D happiest
( ) 4.So far I __________ drawing the pictures.
A finish B finished C have finished D finishing
( ) 5.We have written a letter to the factory to ask them ______ dirty water into the river.
A. to stop to pour B to stop pouring C. stopping to pour D stop pouring
( ) 6.What have you done since you _________ the Greener China?
A joining B join C joined D to join
( ) 7. It's a _______ way to help keep our city clean.
A pleasant B pleased C pleasure D please
( ) 8. I have lived in Beijing___________.
A two years B in two years C for two years ago D for two years
( ) 9.________ you eat, __________ you will be.
A The more, the fatter B. The much, the fatter
C The much, fatter D. More, fatter
( ) 10.China _________ the WTO since November 2001.
A joined B came into C has joined D has been a member of
( ) 11.Don't forget _______ my dictionary tomorrow morning.
A to return B returning C to give D giving
( ) 12 If something _______ you, please let me know.
A happen B happen to C happens D happens to
( ) 13 Not only my parents but also my brother _________ proud of me.
A. is B are C has D have
( ) 14. This dish smells ___________.
A well B better C fine D good
( ) 15 --________ you ever _________ to the Summer Palace?
-- Only once.
A. Have,been B Have, gone C Did,go D. Did went
二. 完形填空
Mr. and Mrs. Moore were invited to a Christmas party at a hotel one year ago. They 1
their car outside and went in. Mr. Moore had never got drunk (醉) before, so he was 2 not
to drink too much, 3 his friends asked him to drink more 4 .
During the party, Mrs. Moore found that she had 5 to bring her bag, so she asked her
husband to go out to the car and 6 it for her. He 7 so, but on his way back to the hotel
gate, he heard a car horn(喇叭) blowing near his own car. He thought 8 might be in need of
help and went over to the car with the 9 . He found a small black bear sitting in the
driving-seat and blowing the horn.
When Mr. Moore 10 the party, he told several people about the bear, but of course they did
not believe him and thought he was drunk. When he took them out of the hotel to 11 that his
story was 12 , he found that the car with the 13 in it had gone. There were so many 14 about
Mr. Moore's black bear during the next week that he at last put an advertisement(广告)in the
newspaper; "If anyone saw a black bear blowing the horn in a car outside the Century Hotel
15 the evening of Christmas Day, please tell..."
Two days later 16 Mrs. Richards called him and said that she and her husband had left
their pet (宠物) bear in their car outside the Century Hotel for a few minutes that evening,
and that 17 he had blown the horn.
Mrs. Richards did not 18 to think there was anything 19 about that. "Our bear likes
blowing car horns," she said, "and we don't 20 when we are not driving the car."
1. A. pulled     B. stayed      C. left      D. hid
2. A. polite     B. careful      C. glad     D. afraid
3. A. whether    B. until      C. or      D. though
4. A. all along    B. once again    C. just then   D. for ever
5. A. learned     B. known      C. remembered D. forgotten
6. A. buy      B. get       C. send     D. return
7. A. said      B. went      C. did      D. thought
8. A. one      B. someone     C. his wife   D. the bear
9. A. noise      B. voice      C. cry      D. shout
10. A. was sent to   B. was seated at   C. got rid of   D. got back to
11. A. show     B. notice      C. require    D. promise
12. A. interesting   B. correct      C. true     D. exciting
13. A. horn     B. bear      C. bag     D. driving-seat
14. A. laughs     B. shouts     C. smiles   D. calls
15. A. for      B. at       C. in     D. on
16. A. the      B. a        C. /       D. some
17. A. quickly    B. completely    C. maybe    D. almost
18. A. mean     B. have      C. know     D. seem
19. A. useful     B. strange      C. common   D. bad
20.A. agree     B. like       C. mind     D. worry
三. 根据上下文的意思,把下列对话补充完整。
A: Hello! May I speak to Helen, please?
B: Sorry, _____________1______________. Who's that?
A: Oh, this is Peter speaking. Is that Mrs. Black?
B: Yes.
A: You know I've got something important to tell her. _______2_________
B: Certainly.
A: Please tell her the students in our class are going to plant trees this Saturday.
B :_______________3________________?
A: We'll meet at the school gate at half past seven that morning.
B:_____________4________________?
A: No, that's all. Thank you, Mrs. Black.
B: _____________5_______________. Bye.
A: Bye.
四. 根据句意和首字母提示,填上合适的单词。
1. Some factories often p______ dirty water into the river.
2. Will you j____ us in the game?
3. We often keep our classroom clean and t_______.
4. N______ of us has been to the Summer Palace.
5. I really hope my father can g_______ up smoking.
6. My parents are very p______ of me.
7. Excuse me,have you got any books o_ science?
8. Have you ever p_______ up apples?
9. I am afraid you must p____ for the lost book.
10. We must put the waste things into d__________.
五. 选择方框内所给词的适当形式填空

1. He ___________ just ___________when he heard a loud knock on the door.
2. They kept ____________the button, but nothing happened at all.
3. _____________they go and work, they always help the local people.
4. _________________, I really don't like surfing.
5. There is only one __________ answer: he is dead.
6. No matter what you say, I ___________________ to leave.
7. There are many______________ between Chinese and Japanese.
8. No ___________ on the floor!
9. Tom has made a big mistake, so he ________________ making his mother angry.
10. Is Mr. Liu in? No, he _______________ to American on business.
六. 完成句子
1. 你还没写完作业呢, 对吧? finish yet
2. 你包过饺子吗? 没有,一次也没有。 make a dumpling no
3. 我已经选好了一双鞋,但还没付款呢。 choose pay
4. 我认识李雷已经五年了。 know
5. 天气越冷,人们穿得就越多。 cold
七. 书面表达。根据提示,写一篇50词以上的短文。
电脑已经成为我们日常工作和生活中必不可少的一部分,我们可以利用它做很多事情,但是如果使用不
当,它也会有很大的弊端。请你陈述它的利与弊。
get information, e-mail, shop on line, waste time, be bad for.
 
【试题答案】
一. 选择填空
1. C 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. B 6. C 7. A 8. D 9. A
10. D 11. A 12. C 13. A 14. D 15. A
二. 完形填空
1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A 5.D 6. B 7. C 8. B 9. A 10.D
11. A 12. C 13. B 14. A 15. D 16. C 17. C 18. D 19. B 20. C
三. 根据上下文的意思,把下列对话补充完整。
1. She is out at the moment.
2. Can you take a message for me?
3. When and where shall meet?
4. Anything else?
5. Not at all.
四. 根据句意和首字母提示,填上合适的单词。
1. pour 2. join 3. tidy 4. None 5. give
6. proud 7.on 8. picked 9. pay 10. dustbin
五、选择方框内所给词的适当形式填空
1. has fallen asleep 2. pressing 3. Wherever 4. Tell you the truth
5. possible 6. make my mind 7. difference
8. spit 9. was afraid of 10. has gone
六. 完成句子
1. You haven't finished your homework yet, have you?
2. Have you ever made dumplings? No. Not even once.
3. I have chosen a pair of shoes. But I haven't pay for it.
4. I have known Li Lei for five years.
5. The colder it is, the more people wear.

被 动 语 态
一、被动语态概述
 语态是动词的一种形式,用以说明主语与谓语动词之间的关系。英语的语态共有两种:主动语态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者,被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者。被动语态是动词的一种特殊形式,一般说来,只有需要动作对象的及物动词才有被动语态。汉语往往用"被"、"受"、"给"等词来表示被动意义。
 如:
 He opened the door.他打开了这扇门。(主动语态)
 The door was opened.这扇门被打开了。(被动语态)
二、被动语态的构成
 被动语态由"助动词be+及物动词的过去分词"构成。被动语态的时态变化只改变be的形式,过去分词部分不变。疑问式和否定式的变化也如此。
 1、被动语态的时态较常见的八种,现以动词clean为例列表说明:

 2、被动语态的句式变化:
 以一般现在时和动词invite为例,列表说明被动语态的句式变化:

 3、含有情态动词的被动语态
 情态动词的被动语态结构为:情态动词+be+过去分词;其时态及句型的变化仅由情态动词完成,"be+过去分词"部分不变。如:
 Tables can be made of stone.桌子可由石头制造。
 Tables could be made of stone at that time.那时桌子可由石头制造。(一般过去时)
 Can tables be made of stone? 桌子能用石头制造吗?(疑问句)
三、被动语态的用法:
 1、不知道或没有必要指出谁是动作的执行者时。
 The bridge was built last year.这座桥是去年建造的。
 He was elected chairman.他被选为主席。
 2、 当更加强调动作的承受者时。此时动作的执行者由by引导置于谓语动词之后,不需要时可以省略。
 The room hasn't been cleaned yet.房间还没有打扫。
 The tiger was killed by him.老虎被他杀死了。
 3、当动作的执行者不是人时,多用被动语态。如:
 The window was blown by wind.窗户被风吹开了。
 The whole village has been washed away by the flood.整个村庄都被洪水冲走了。
 4、表示客观的说明常用"It is + 过去分词."句型。
 It is said that Lucy has gone abroad.据说露茜已经出国了。
 It is believed that he is a spy. (=He is believed to be a spy.)大家相信他是个间谍。
 其它常见的"It is + 过去分词+ that"句型还有
 It is reported that...据报道
 It is said that...据说
 It is believed that...大家相信
 It is suggested that...有人建议
四、主动语态变为被动语态

 转换图示:

 1、主动语态变为被动语态的步骤:
 (1)将主动句的宾语变为主语:
 注意:如果主动句的宾语是代词,需将其由宾格变为主格。如:
 Tom killed him. → He was killed by Tom.
 (2)将动词改为"be+过去分词"。
 注意:
 They held a meeting yesterday. → A meeting was held by them yesterday.
 他们昨天开会了。
 (3)将主动语态的主语改为be...放在谓语动词后。
 注意:如果原主语是代词,则应由主格变为宾格。
 He sang a song. → A song was sung by him.
 

 2、主动语态变为被动语态的注意事项:

 (1)主动句中的主语如果是people, we, you, they, somebody等含糊地表示"人们"、"大家"的单词,变为主动句时,通常删去"by...",但原主语被强调者除外。如:
 They set up this hospital in 1975. → This hospital was set up in 1975.
 这所医院建于1975年。
 Only he can finish the job. → 只有他能完成这项工作。
 The job can be finished only by him.这项工作只能由他来完成。
 (2)含有双宾语,即直接宾语和间接宾语的句子,每个宾语都可变为被动语态的主语,即其被动语态有两种形式。但多以间接宾语作主语。
 Jack told us the truth.杰克告诉了我们真相。
 We were told the truth by Jack.
 The truth was told (to) us by Jack.
五、动词的主动形式表示被动之意
 以主动形式表示被动之意的动词多为连系动词,如:look, feel, smell等。下列动词没有被动式:happen, cost,take,have
 An accident was happened yesterday.(×)昨天发生了一起事故。
 An accident happened yesterday.( )
 The flower smells sweet.这花闻起来很香。
 The watch looks good.这表看起来很好。
 This book sells well.这本书畅销。
六、各种时态的被动语态举例(以动词do为例)
 1.一般现在时(am/ is/ are +done)
 English is spoken by lots of people in the world. 世界上的许多人都说英语。
 Class meeting is held every Thursday. 每周四都举行班会。
 The classroom is cleaned by the students every day. 学生们每天都打扫教室。
 2.一般过去时(was/ were +done)
 The cup was broken by the boy. 杯子被那个男孩打碎了。
 He was saved at last. 他最终获救了。
 My bike was stolen. 我的自行车被偷了。
 3.一般将来时与过去将来时(will/ shall be +done; would/should be +done)
 A speech will be given this afternoon. 今天下午有一个演讲。
 A new road will be built next year. 明年要修一条新马路。
 I thought thousands of people would be helped. 我认为将有数千人得到帮助。
 4.现在进行时与过去进行时(am/ is/ are being +done; was/ were being +done)
 The machine was being repaired at this time yesterday. 昨天这时,机器正在被修理。
 The problem is being discussed now. 问题正在被讨论。
 A bus is being pushed by the passengers. 路人正在推一辆公共汽车。
 5.现在完成时(have/ has been + done)
 Two hundred trees have been planted by now. 到现在为止,已经种了二百棵树了。
 The book has been read many times by me. 这本书已经被我读了许多遍了。
 Several soldiers have already been killed in the conflict. 在冲突中已经有几名士兵被杀害。
 6.过去完成时(had been+done)
 They said they had been invited to the party. 他们说已经被邀请参加晚会了。
 She found the house had been destroyed by the storm. 她发现房子已经被暴风雨摧毁。
 He had been tortured by the illness for many years before he died.
 他在去世前已经被疾病折磨很多年了。
被动语态专项练习
Ⅰ单项选择
1. Good books ____ again and again.
A. should be readed B. should be read
C. must read D. ought to read
2. The children ____ by the nurse.
A. were looked B. looked after
C. were looked after D. looked
3. He ___ some pieces of advice, but he ____ to them.
A. gave, didn't listen B. was given, wasn't listened
C. give, wasn't listened D. was given, didn't listen
4. When____ the accident _____ ?
A. was, happen B. did, happen
C. is, happen D. was, happened
5. The question ____ by us soon.
A. is going to discuss B. will discuss
C. is going to be discussed D. has been discussed
6. The lab ____ about five years ago.
A. was builded B. was built C. builds D. has been built
7. A lot of tall buildings _____ in his hometown in the last three years.
A. have set up B. have been set up C. were set up D. set up
8. They ____ printing 500 copies by the end of last month.
A. had finished B. have finished C. had been finished D. have been finished
9. Rice ___ also _____ in their hometown.
A. is...grown B. is...grew C. was...grew D. was...grown
10. He ____ by the teachers.
A. is always praised B. praises
C. have been praised D. always is praised
11. Great changes ____ place. Many new schools____ .
A. have taken, have been opened B. take, are open
C. are taken, open D. have been taken, are opened
12. The picture______ in October, 1996.
A. was taking B. had been taken C. was taken D. had taken
13. We can't use the bridge now, because it______ .
A. has been repaired B. is repairing C. is repaired D. is being repaired
14. I ______the way to the railway station by a policeman.
A. was shown B. showed C. have shown D. was showing
15. The war______ in 1941.
A. broke out B. had been broken out
C. was broken out D. had broken out
16. When water______ , it will be changed into vapour.
A. is heated B. heating C. has heated D. heats
17. We can't enter the room because its door______ .
A. locked B. locks C. is locked D. is locking
18. They ______day and night.
A. are made work B. are made to work
C. made to be worked D. are making to work
19. Chang'an Road is ______of people.
A. filled B. fill C. full D. fulled
20. Man-made satellites ______into space by many countries.
A. was sent up B. is sent up
C. have been sent up D. has been sent up
21. This English song _____ often _____ by the children.
A. is, singing B. is, sung C. will, sing D. was, sung
22.The windows of our house _____once a week.
A. must clean B. have cleaned C. is cleaned D. are cleaned
23. When ______ the People's Republic of China_____ ?
A. was, found B. was, founded C. did, found D. does, found
24. Mary's radio ______ by my brother just now.
A. will be mended B. has mended C. was mended D. mended
25. Your exercise books _____ after class.
A. will hand in B. must hand in C. handed in D. must be handed in
26. Some trees may ______ at other times of the year.
A. be planted B. plant C. are planted D. will be planted
27. The sun _____ at night as usual.
A. can be seen B. can't see C. can't be seen D. doesn't see
28. A new English play _____ there next week.
A. will put on B. will be put on C. is going to put on D. will be putted on
29. A strange thing _____ in our school yesterday.
A. was happened B. has been happened C. happened D. was going to happen
30. The glass ______ . It _____ by little Tom this morning.
A. broke, is broken B. is broken, was broken
C. was broken, broke D. has been broken, broken
Ⅱ把下列句子改为被动语态
1. I saw the boy run yesterday.
2. He told me that he would come back soon.
3. You can find a lot of differences between the two languages.
4. Do you water your flowers every day?
5. The wind blew down the big tree last night.
6. I think that he is right.
7. He had not thrown the bad food.
8. Mother was not mending the trousers.
9. They would not take him to Beijing.
10. Nobody knew me in this town at that time.
参考答案
Ⅰ单项选择
1. B 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. C
6. B 7. B 8. A 9. A 10. A
11. A 12. C 13. D 14. A 15. A
16. A 17. C 18. B 19. C 20. C
21.B 22. D 23.B 24. C 25.D
26. A 27. C 28. B 29. C 30. B
Ⅱ、把下列句子改为被动语态
1. The boy was seen to run by me yesterday.
2. I was told that he would come back soon.
3. A lot of differences can be found by you between the two languages.
4. Are your flowers watered every day?
5. The big tree was blown down last night.
6. It is thought that he is right.
7. The bad food had not been thrown.
8. The trousers were not being mended by my mother.
9. He would not be taken to Beijing.
10. I was known by nobody in this town at that time.

初三英语(上)期末练习题二
一、单词拼写
1. Thomas Edison was a great American i_________.
2. Some people even put up stockings for their p______ as well on Christmas Eve.
3. Dumplings are the most t________ Chinese food in the Spring Festival.
4. A writing brush is made of b_____ and animal's hair.
5. English is used very w______ as a foreign language.
6. There is a very special dinosaur on d_______ in the museum.
7. Please tie the tree to the top of the stick to keep it s_______.
8. The trees in the forests can keep rain drops from hitting the s ______ directly.
9. When we talk about the u_______, we mean the earth, the sun, the moon and the stars, and the space between them.
10. Most countries use satellites to send and r_______ messages.

二、单项填空。
( ) 1. My parents are workers. _______ both work in the same factory.
A. Them B. They C. He D. She
( ) 2. " Can you fly a kite?" " No, I ______."
A. mustn't B. needn't C. can't D. couldn't
( ) 3. There is still a little orange here, but ______ people want to drink it.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
( ) 4. Could you tell me ______ ?
A. where does Li Lei work? B. where did Li Lei work
C. where Li Lei works D. where Li Lei worked
( ) 5. " Joe could swim when she was only four years old."
" ______ clever the girl was!"
A. How B. What a C. What D. How a
( ) 6. " Hi, Jim. We are going to play basketball this Sunday."
" ______ ."
A. So I am B. So do I C. So I do D. So am I
( ) 7. I'm thirsty. Would you please ______ me a bottle of water?
A. take B. carry C. pull D. bring
( ) 8. Tai Wan is ______ the southeast of China.
A. to B. in C. on D. at
( ) 9. Work hard, ______ you won't catch up with your classmates.
A. but B. so C. or D. and
( ) 10. ______ of them has read the interesting story.
A. Both B. All C. Neither D. Most
( ) 11. She was not in, so I ______ her a message on her desk.
A. left B. took C. got D. put
( ) 12. " ______ you ever _______ the film?"
" Yes, let me tall you something about it."
A. Did, see B. Will, see C. Have, seen D. Do, see
( ) 13. Every four years, ______ people watch the Olympic Games.
A. million of B. millions of C. two millions D. two million
( ) 14. I got up late and hurried to school ______ breakfast.
A. without B. to C. for D. about
( ) 15. Which is ______ , the bus, the train or the plane?
A. cheaper B. the cheaper C. the cheapest D. cheapest
( ) 16. He wasn't feeling well. He had to ______ .
A. stop working B. stops working C. stops to work D, stop to work
( ) 17. "______ do you go to the film?" " Sometimes."
A. How long B. How much C. How many D. How often
( ) 18. The teacher asked Xiao Ming ______ late for school again.
A. not to be B. not be C. don't be D. not to
( ) 19. " What do you ______ breakfast?" " Fresh oranges, bread and eggs."
A. cook with B. pay for C. have for D. think for
( ) 20. " Thank you for the delicious dinner."
"______."
A. Don't say that B. It's nothing
B. I don't think it's good D. I'm glad you enjoyed it.

三、补全对话
A: Hello! 28361579.
B: Is 1 Mr. Jones?
A: Sorry, he 2 in at the moment. He left home a few minutes 3 .
B: 4 a pity! Will he come back soon?
A: I'm not sure. Can I 5 a message for him?
B: It's very 6 of you. There will 7 a meeting at 2:00 tomorrow afternoon. Please tell him to come 8 time.
A: I certainly will. I'll tell him as 9 as he comes back.
B: Thanks a lot. Good-bye!
A: You're 10 .

四、完成句子
1. 外面风很大,你最好别开窗户。
It's blowing hard outside. You'd _______ _______ _______ the window.
2. 他年纪太小不能干重活。
He is _______ old _______ do the hard work.
3. 这些书既不是故事书也不是小说。
These books are _______ short stories _______ novels.
4. 他们停下来去听天气预报。
They stopped ________ _______ ________ the weather report.
5. 我花费了两个小时看完这本书。
It ________ me two hours _______ _______ reading the novels.
6. 汤姆学习不如彼得认真。
Tom doesn't study _______ _______ as Peter.

五、阅读理解
A
Martin Baker is a bus driver. He lives in a small town with his wife and four children. His wife's father, Mr Butcher, lives with them, too. He is too old to do any work. He sits in his chair by the fireside all day, but sometimes, in summer, takes his chair into the garden.
Mr Baker has been ill for over a month. He has been too ill to go to work. And he can't drive his bus.
( ) 1. How many people are living in Mr Baker's family?
A. Five B. Six C. Seven D. Eight
( ) 2. Mr Baker has been ill for __________.
A. four and a half months B. a summer
C. about a month D. more than a month
( ) 3. Mr Butcher is __________.
A. so old that he can't do any work B. Martin Baker's father
C. a bus driver D. lying in his chair by the fireside

B
Weather forecast of major Chinese cities
City Max(c) Min(c) Weather
Beijing 27 19 thundershowers
Tianjin 28 18 drizzle
Shanghai 35 27 Sunny
Xi'an 36 22 cloudy to showers
Chengdu 28 21 thundershowers
Kunming 26 17 drizzle
Harbin 31 18 Sunny
Wuhan 38 30 Sunny
( ) 4. What's the weather like in Shanghai?
A. drizzle B. fine C. cloudy D. thundershowers
( ) 5. Which city has the highest temperature?
A. Wuhan B. shanghai C. Xi'an D. Harbin
( ) 6. There are thundershowers in _______ .
A. Tianjin B. Beijing C. Chengdu D. both B and C

C

Newspaper Advertisements(广告)

Business Services
Tutoring(家教)
English, Math, Physics, Computer
Call Miss Smith, 800-3594
Early hour wake-up service
Tel. 800-0780
Wedding invitations(婚礼邀请)
Call 800-0942 anytime
Typing and editing(打字编辑)
Call Jean, 800-3535, 10a.m.-10p.m.
Guitar teacher
Wants students. Folk/ jazz. Bob 800-7535
Help Wanted
Baby-sitter(保姆)
My home: care for a school age child. Please call Gayle Moore days 800-1111, evenings and weekends 800-4964
Telephone receptionist(接线员)
No experience necessary. Good pay. Tel. 800-2817. After 9 a.m.
Waitress(女招待)
Wanted 10 a.m.-2 p.m. or 10:30a.m.-5 p.m. Apply in person.
Curtis Restaurant.
( ) 7. If you want to find someone to help your child with his math in his spare time, what will you do?
A. Call Gayle moor days 800-1111.
B. Call Miss Smith, 800-3594.
C. Call 800-2817
D. Call Jean, 800-3535, 10 a.m.
( ) 8. Which phone number can you call to have services about wedding invitations?
A. 800-0942 B. 800-7535
C. 800-3535 D. 800-0780
( ) 9. Who probably(可能)wants to teach students to play the guitar?
A. Steve B. Jean C. Bob D. Moore
( ) 10. Gayle Moore wants someone to ______ .
A. take care of his sick child in the hospital.
B. wake him up early in the morning
C. help his child with his lessons.
D. take care of his child at home.
( ) 11. What do the Curtis Restaurant say in its advertisement?
A. A telephone receptionist is wanted.
B. Help is wanted for housework .
C. Waitresses are wanted.
D. Math and English can be taught.
D
Bob was happy. He was at a new school, and the other students were friendly. "Hi, Bob!" they said. But some students said, "Hi, Peter!" Bob didn't understand. He asked another student, "Why do some students call me Peter?"
"Oh, that's easy to answer," the students said. "Peter was a student here last year. Now he goes to a different school. You look like Peter. Some students think that you're Peter."
Bob wanted to meet Peter. He got Peter's address from a student and went to Peter's house. Peter opened the door. Bob couldn't believe his eyes. He looked really like Peter! Bob and Peter had the same colour eyes and the same smile. They had the same black hair. They also had the same birthday. And they both were adopted(领养) by two different families.
Bob and Peter found out that they were twin brothers. Soon after the boys were born, one family adopted Bob, and another family adopted Peter. Bob's family never knew about Peter, and Peter's family never knew about Bob.
Bob and Peter's story was in the newspaper. There was a photo of Bob and Peter next to the story. A young man named John saw the photo in the newspaper. John couldn't believe his eyes. He looked really like Bob and Peter! He had the same colour eyes and the same smile. He had the same black hair. He had the same birthday. And he, too, was adopted by another family.
Later John met Bob and Peter. When Bob and Peter saw John, they couldn't believe their eyes. John looked really like them! Why did John look really like Bob and Peter? You can guess. Bob and Peter are not twins. Bob, Peter and John are triplets(三胞胎).
( ) 12. Bob was _______ at a new school.
A. sorry B. happy C. worried D. sad
( ) 13. Some students thought _______.
A. John was Peter B. Bob was John C. Bob was Peter D. Peter was John
( ) 14. John knew the story from_______.
A. the newspaper B. a book C. other people D. his parents
( ) 15. Bob, Peter and John were_______.
A. friends B. classmates C. brothers D. twins

六、完型填空。

A
Miss Yang works in the library of No. 14 Middle School. She is very __1__ and looks after the books very __2__. She is very strict. Everyone must return the books__3__ time. One day Meimei came to the library. She __4__ she couldn't find her library book "Red Star __5__ China". Miss Yang asked her __6__ for it. At that moment, Lucy came and __7__ a book to Miss Yang. It was Meimei's library book! Meimei was very __8__. She thanked Lucy. Miss Yang __9__ Meimei to be more careful from then __10__.
( )1. A. help B. helps C. helpful D. helping
( )2. A. careful B. more careful C. carefully D. more carefully
( )3. A. on B. in C. for D. with
( )4. A. says B. said C. has said D. saying
( )5. A. in B. on C. over D. about
( )6. A. pay B. paying C. paid D. to pay
( )7. A. show B. shows C. shown D. showed
( )8. A. pleased B. pleasing C. place D. happily
( )9. A. tell B. tells C. told D. said
( )10.A.in B. on C. over D. of

B
One day a pig went to the stable(马棚)to __1__ a good friend, an old horse, and was going to ___2__ there for the night . Night came and it was time___3___ sleep. The pig went into the straw heap(稻草堆) and lay comfortably(舒服地). A long time __4__, but the horse was still___5___ there and did not move. So the pig asked the horse ___6____ he did not go to sleep. "Standing like this is the beginning of sleeping." answered the ____7____.The pig found it __8___ to believe(相信) and said, "How can you stand there sleeping? It is not comfortable at all." The horse answered, "Comfort is your habit(习性).___9____ horses, we have the habit of running quickly. So we are always ready to run quickly even if(即使) we are ___10___.
( )1. A. look B. see C. watch D. look at
( )2. A. left B. sit C. lay D. stay
( )3. A. by B. on C. to D. with
( )4. A. passed B. pass C. past D. was passed
( )5. A. standing B. stands C. sitting D. lying
( )6. A. what B. why C. when D. which
( )7. A. animals B. pig C. horse D. heap
( )8. A. hardly B. easily C. difficult D. easy
( )9. A. While B. For C. As D. Like
( )10. A. sleep B. asleep C. slept D. to sleep
初三英语(上)期末练习题二答案
一、单词拼写
1. inventor 2. pets 3. traditional 4. bamboo 5. widely
6. display 7. straight 8. soil 9. universe 10. receive

二、单项填空。
1. B 父母双亲是两个人,用they指代。
2. C 表示做某事的能力,用can或can't。
3. C 首先发现要修饰的名词people是可数名词,因此只能考虑few或a few;然后从全句的意思来分析,应该是"瓶子里还有一点橘汁,但是没有人想喝",因此选择表示否定意思的few.
4. C 宾语从句后接陈述句的语序,只能考虑C或D。该句的Could用来表示礼貌语气,并不是can的过去式,因此从句的谓语没有必要用过去时。
5. A How + adj + 名词/ 代词+ be
6. B So do I:"我也是"
7. D bring sb sth:给某人带来某东西
8. B 在范围以内的东、南、西、北等用in
9. C or在该句中的意思是"否则"
10. C 从谓语动词has read可以看出,主语应该是单数形式的。而A.B.D用做主语时都是表示复数的。
11. A leave a message:"给...留个话"
12. C 强调动作对现在造成的影响或后果,经常用现在完成时。
13. B millions of:数百万。用来表示模糊概念。
14. A without breakfast:"没有吃早饭"
15. C 三者选一,通常用最高级。
16. A 由于不舒服,因此要停止工作。stop doing sth:"停止做某事"
17. D 对频率提问,用how often.
18. A ask sb not to do sth
19. C "早饭吃了...": have... for breakfast
20. D D最符合说话的习惯。

三、补全对话
1. that 2. isn't 3. ago 4. What 5. take
6. kind 7. be 8. on 9. soon 10. welcome

四、完成句子
1. better not open
2. too, to
3. neither, nor
4. to listen to
5. to finish
6. so hard

五、阅读理解
1. C 除了他自己,还有他的妻子,四个孩子,以及他太太的父亲,共7个人。
2. D "Mr Baker has been ill for over a month."
3. A "He is too old to do any work."
4. B
5. A
6. D
7. B 看"家教"一栏
8. A
9. C
10. D 在 " Help wanted"一栏可以找到答案。
11. C 在最后的Waitress一栏可以找到答案。
12. B "Bob was happy. He was at a new school, and the other students were friendly."
13. C 同学们把Bob误认为是上学期在这里上学的Peter。
14. A
15. C "Bob, Peter and John are triplets(三胞胎)."

六、完型填空。
A
1. C helpful:乐于助人的
2. C 此空需要填入一个副词。
3. A on time:按时、准时
4. B 此空需要填入动词的过去时。
5. C
6. D ask sb. to do sth
7. D show的过去式是showed
8. A be pleased:感到高兴的
9. C
10. B "from then on":从那时侯开始

B
1. B 看望某人:see sb
2. D
3. C It's time to do sth: 该做...的时间
4. A
5. A was standing是过去进行时
6. B
7. C
8. C 从上下文可以得知,是很难相信"马"所说的话
9. C as在该句中是表示身份
10. B asleep表示熟睡的状态。

初三英语(上)期末练习题二
一、单词拼写
1. Thomas Edison was a great American i_________.
2. Some people even put up stockings for their p______ as well on Christmas Eve.
3. Dumplings are the most t________ Chinese food in the Spring Festival.
4. A writing brush is made of b_____ and animal's hair.
5. English is used very w______ as a foreign language.
6. There is a very special dinosaur on d_______ in the museum.
7. Please tie the tree to the top of the stick to keep it s_______.
8. The trees in the forests can keep rain drops from hitting the s ______ directly.
9. When we talk about the u_______, we mean the earth, the sun, the moon and the stars, and the space between them.
10. Most countries use satellites to send and r_______ messages.

二、单项填空。
( ) 1. My parents are workers. _______ both work in the same factory.
A. Them B. They C. He D. She
( ) 2. " Can you fly a kite?" " No, I ______."
A. mustn't B. needn't C. can't D. couldn't
( ) 3. There is still a little orange here, but ______ people want to drink it.
A. little B. a little C. few D. a few
( ) 4. Could you tell me ______ ?
A. where does Li Lei work? B. where did Li Lei work
C. where Li Lei works D. where Li Lei worked
( ) 5. " Joe could swim when she was only four years old."
" ______ clever the girl was!"
A. How B. What a C. What D. How a
( ) 6. " Hi, Jim. We are going to play basketball this Sunday."
" ______ ."
A. So I am B. So do I C. So I do D. So am I
( ) 7. I'm thirsty. Would you please ______ me a bottle of water?
A. take B. carry C. pull D. bring
( ) 8. Tai Wan is ______ the southeast of China.
A. to B. in C. on D. at
( ) 9. Work hard, ______ you won't catch up with your classmates.
A. but B. so C. or D. and
( ) 10. ______ of them has read the interesting story.
A. Both B. All C. Neither D. Most
( ) 11. She was not in, so I ______ her a message on her desk.
A. left B. took C. got D. put
( ) 12. " ______ you ever _______ the film?"
" Yes, let me tall you something about it."
A. Did, see B. Will, see C. Have, seen D. Do, see
( ) 13. Every four years, ______ people watch the Olympic Games.
A. million of B. millions of C. two millions D. two million
( ) 14. I got up late and hurried to school ______ breakfast.
A. without B. to C. for D. about
( ) 15. Which is ______ , the bus, the train or the plane?
A. cheaper B. the cheaper C. the cheapest D. cheapest
( ) 16. He wasn't feeling well. He had to ______ .
A. stop working B. stops working C. stops to work D, stop to work
( ) 17. "______ do you go to the film?" " Sometimes."
A. How long B. How much C. How many D. How often
( ) 18. The teacher asked Xiao Ming ______ late for school again.
A. not to be B. not be C. don't be D. not to
( ) 19. " What do you ______ breakfast?" " Fresh oranges, bread and eggs."
A. cook with B. pay for C. have for D. think for
( ) 20. " Thank you for the delicious dinner."
"______."
A. Don't say that B. It's nothing
B. I don't think it's good D. I'm glad you enjoyed it.

三、补全对话
A: Hello! 28361579.
B: Is 1 Mr. Jones?
A: Sorry, he 2 in at the moment. He left home a few minutes 3 .
B: 4 a pity! Will he come back soon?
A: I'm not sure. Can I 5 a message for him?
B: It's very 6 of you. There will 7 a meeting at 2:00 tomorrow afternoon. Please tell him to come 8 time.
A: I certainly will. I'll tell him as 9 as he comes back.
B: Thanks a lot. Good-bye!
A: You're 10 .

四、完成句子
1. 外面风很大,你最好别开窗户。
It's blowing hard outside. You'd _______ _______ _______ the window.
2. 他年纪太小不能干重活。
He is _______ old _______ do the hard work.
3. 这些书既不是故事书也不是小说。
These books are _______ short stories _______ novels.
4. 他们停下来去听天气预报。
They stopped ________ _______ ________ the weather report.
5. 我花费了两个小时看完这本书。
It ________ me two hours _______ _______ reading the novels.
6. 汤姆学习不如彼得认真。
Tom doesn't study _______ _______ as Peter.

五、阅读理解
A
Martin Baker is a bus driver. He lives in a small town with his wife and four children. His wife's father, Mr Butcher, lives with them, too. He is too old to do any work. He sits in his chair by the fireside all day, but sometimes, in summer, takes his chair into the garden.
Mr Baker has been ill for over a month. He has been too ill to go to work. And he can't drive his bus.
( ) 1. How many people are living in Mr Baker's family?
A. Five B. Six C. Seven D. Eight
( ) 2. Mr Baker has been ill for __________.
A. four and a half months B. a summer
C. about a month D. more than a month
( ) 3. Mr Butcher is __________.
A. so old that he can't do any work B. Martin Baker's father
C. a bus driver D. lying in his chair by the fireside

B
Weather forecast of major Chinese cities
City Max(c) Min(c) Weather
Beijing 27 19 thundershowers
Tianjin 28 18 drizzle
Shanghai 35 27 Sunny
Xi'an 36 22 cloudy to showers
Chengdu 28 21 thundershowers
Kunming 26 17 drizzle
Harbin 31 18 Sunny
Wuhan 38 30 Sunny
( ) 4. What's the weather like in Shanghai?
A. drizzle B. fine C. cloudy D. thundershowers
( ) 5. Which city has the highest temperature?
A. Wuhan B. shanghai C. Xi'an D. Harbin
( ) 6. There are thundershowers in _______ .
A. Tianjin B. Beijing C. Chengdu D. both B and C

C

Newspaper Advertisements(广告)

Business Services
Tutoring(家教)
English, Math, Physics, Computer
Call Miss Smith, 800-3594
Early hour wake-up service
Tel. 800-0780
Wedding invitations(婚礼邀请)
Call 800-0942 anytime
Typing and editing(打字编辑)
Call Jean, 800-3535, 10a.m.-10p.m.
Guitar teacher
Wants students. Folk/ jazz. Bob 800-7535
Help Wanted
Baby-sitter(保姆)
My home: care for a school age child. Please call Gayle Moore days 800-1111, evenings and weekends 800-4964
Telephone receptionist(接线员)
No experience necessary. Good pay. Tel. 800-2817. After 9 a.m.
Waitress(女招待)
Wanted 10 a.m.-2 p.m. or 10:30a.m.-5 p.m. Apply in person.
Curtis Restaurant.
( ) 7. If you want to find someone to help your child with his math in his spare time, what will you do?
A. Call Gayle moor days 800-1111.
B. Call Miss Smith, 800-3594.
C. Call 800-2817
D. Call Jean, 800-3535, 10 a.m.
( ) 8. Which phone number can you call to have services about wedding invitations?
A. 800-0942 B. 800-7535
C. 800-3535 D. 800-0780
( ) 9. Who probably(可能)wants to teach students to play the guitar?
A. Steve B. Jean C. Bob D. Moore
( ) 10. Gayle Moore wants someone to ______ .
A. take care of his sick child in the hospital.
B. wake him up early in the morning
C. help his child with his lessons.
D. take care of his child at home.
( ) 11. What do the Curtis Restaurant say in its advertisement?
A. A telephone receptionist is wanted.
B. Help is wanted for housework .
C. Waitresses are wanted.
D. Math and English can be taught.
D
Bob was happy. He was at a new school, and the other students were friendly. "Hi, Bob!" they said. But some students said, "Hi, Peter!" Bob didn't understand. He asked another student, "Why do some students call me Peter?"
"Oh, that's easy to answer," the students said. "Peter was a student here last year. Now he goes to a different school. You look like Peter. Some students think that you're Peter."
Bob wanted to meet Peter. He got Peter's address from a student and went to Peter's house. Peter opened the door. Bob couldn't believe his eyes. He looked really like Peter! Bob and Peter had the same colour eyes and the same smile. They had the same black hair. They also had the same birthday. And they both were adopted(领养) by two different families.
Bob and Peter found out that they were twin brothers. Soon after the boys were born, one family adopted Bob, and another family adopted Peter. Bob's family never knew about Peter, and Peter's family never knew about Bob.
Bob and Peter's story was in the newspaper. There was a photo of Bob and Peter next to the story. A young man named John saw the photo in the newspaper. John couldn't believe his eyes. He looked really like Bob and Peter! He had the same colour eyes and the same smile. He had the same black hair. He had the same birthday. And he, too, was adopted by another family.
Later John met Bob and Peter. When Bob and Peter saw John, they couldn't believe their eyes. John looked really like them! Why did John look really like Bob and Peter? You can guess. Bob and Peter are not twins. Bob, Peter and John are triplets(三胞胎).
( ) 12. Bob was _______ at a new school.
A. sorry B. happy C. worried D. sad
( ) 13. Some students thought _______.
A. John was Peter B. Bob was John C. Bob was Peter D. Peter was John
( ) 14. John knew the story from_______.
A. the newspaper B. a book C. other people D. his parents
( ) 15. Bob, Peter and John were_______.
A. friends B. classmates C. brothers D. twins

六、完型填空。

A
Miss Yang works in the library of No. 14 Middle School. She is very __1__ and looks after the books very __2__. She is very strict. Everyone must return the books__3__ time. One day Meimei came to the library. She __4__ she couldn't find her library book "Red Star __5__ China". Miss Yang asked her __6__ for it. At that moment, Lucy came and __7__ a book to Miss Yang. It was Meimei's library book! Meimei was very __8__. She thanked Lucy. Miss Yang __9__ Meimei to be more careful from then __10__.
( )1. A. help B. helps C. helpful D. helping
( )2. A. careful B. more careful C. carefully D. more carefully
( )3. A. on B. in C. for D. with
( )4. A. says B. said C. has said D. saying
( )5. A. in B. on C. over D. about
( )6. A. pay B. paying C. paid D. to pay
( )7. A. show B. shows C. shown D. showed
( )8. A. pleased B. pleasing C. place D. happily
( )9. A. tell B. tells C. told D. said
( )10.A.in B. on C. over D. of

B
One day a pig went to the stable(马棚)to __1__ a good friend, an old horse, and was going to ___2__ there for the night . Night came and it was time___3___ sleep. The pig went into the straw heap(稻草堆) and lay comfortably(舒服地). A long time __4__, but the horse was still___5___ there and did not move. So the pig asked the horse ___6____ he did not go to sleep. "Standing like this is the beginning of sleeping." answered the ____7____.The pig found it __8___ to believe(相信) and said, "How can you stand there sleeping? It is not comfortable at all." The horse answered, "Comfort is your habit(习性).___9____ horses, we have the habit of running quickly. So we are always ready to run quickly even if(即使) we are ___10___.
( )1. A. look B. see C. watch D. look at
( )2. A. left B. sit C. lay D. stay
( )3. A. by B. on C. to D. with
( )4. A. passed B. pass C. past D. was passed
( )5. A. standing B. stands C. sitting D. lying
( )6. A. what B. why C. when D. which
( )7. A. animals B. pig C. horse D. heap
( )8. A. hardly B. easily C. difficult D. easy
( )9. A. While B. For C. As D. Like
( )10. A. sleep B. asleep C. slept D. to sleep
初三英语(上)期末练习题二答案
一、单词拼写
1. inventor 2. pets 3. traditional 4. bamboo 5. widely
6. display 7. straight 8. soil 9. universe 10. receive

二、单项填空。
1. B 父母双亲是两个人,用they指代。
2. C 表示做某事的能力,用can或can't。
3. C 首先发现要修饰的名词people是可数名词,因此只能考虑few或a few;然后从全句的意思来分析,应该是"瓶子里还有一点橘汁,但是没有人想喝",因此选择表示否定意思的few.
4. C 宾语从句后接陈述句的语序,只能考虑C或D。该句的Could用来表示礼貌语气,并不是can的过去式,因此从句的谓语没有必要用过去时。
5. A How + adj + 名词/ 代词+ be
6. B So do I:"我也是"
7. D bring sb sth:给某人带来某东西
8. B 在范围以内的东、南、西、北等用in
9. C or在该句中的意思是"否则"
10. C 从谓语动词has read可以看出,主语应该是单数形式的。而A.B.D用做主语时都是表示复数的。
11. A leave a message:"给...留个话"
12. C 强调动作对现在造成的影响或后果,经常用现在完成时。
13. B millions of:数百万。用来表示模糊概念。
14. A without breakfast:"没有吃早饭"
15. C 三者选一,通常用最高级。
16. A 由于不舒服,因此要停止工作。stop doing sth:"停止做某事"
17. D 对频率提问,用how often.
18. A ask sb not to do sth
19. C "早饭吃了...": have... for breakfast
20. D D最符合说话的习惯。

三、补全对话
1. that 2. isn't 3. ago 4. What 5. take
6. kind 7. be 8. on 9. soon 10. welcome

四、完成句子
1. better not open
2. too, to
3. neither, nor
4. to listen to
5. to finish
6. so hard

五、阅读理解
1. C 除了他自己,还有他的妻子,四个孩子,以及他太太的父亲,共7个人。
2. D "Mr Baker has been ill for over a month."
3. A "He is too old to do any work."
4. B
5. A
6. D
7. B 看"家教"一栏
8. A
9. C
10. D 在 " Help wanted"一栏可以找到答案。
11. C 在最后的Waitress一栏可以找到答案。
12. B "Bob was happy. He was at a new school, and the other students were friendly."
13. C 同学们把Bob误认为是上学期在这里上学的Peter。
14. A
15. C "Bob, Peter and John are triplets(三胞胎)."

六、完型填空。
A
1. C helpful:乐于助人的
2. C 此空需要填入一个副词。
3. A on time:按时、准时
4. B 此空需要填入动词的过去时。
5. C
6. D ask sb. to do sth
7. D show的过去式是showed
8. A be pleased:感到高兴的
9. C
10. B "from then on":从那时侯开始

B
1. B 看望某人:see sb
2. D
3. C It's time to do sth: 该做...的时间
4. A
5. A was standing是过去进行时
6. B
7. C
8. C 从上下文可以得知,是很难相信"马"所说的话
9. C as在该句中是表示身份
10. B asleep表示熟睡的状态。

初三英语(上)期末练习题三
一、单词拼写。根据中文提示,填入正确的单词。
1、I'm looking for a pair of black____(鞋)
2、John put the suit on, and then went to look at ____(自己)in a mirror.
3、They talked on and on very ____(高兴的)
4、If you're not____(好)by then, I'll take you to see the doctor.
5、Thank you very much for ____(指给)me the way.
6、They ____(离开)five minutes ago.
7、If you learn even a little English, you will find it ____(有用的)
8、The watch was the ____(便宜)one in our country.
9、There are three ____(德国人)in his factory.
10、May is the ____(五)month of the year.

二、单项选择
1.______ trees have been planted in our school in the past 10 years.
A.Thousands of B.Two thousands C.Thousand of D.Two thousand of
2.He hardly hurt himself in the accident, ______ ?
A.doesn't he B.didn't he C.did he D.does he
3.Is the street too narrow for the bus to go ______ ?
A.through B.across C.on D.in
4.It really took him ______ to draw the nice horse.
A.sometimes B.hour C.long time D.some time
5.Could you tell me ______ with the money?
A.how to do B.what should I do
C.how I should do D.what I should do
6. The Chang Jiang River is one of _____in the world.
A. the longer river B. the longest river
C. the longest rivers D. the long rivers
7.How long ___ his dog___?
A. has, been dead B. has, died C. has, been died D. has, dead
8. Yesterday Jack ___ a story book to Dick's sister. She can ___ the book for two days.
A. lent, borrow B. borrowed, keep C. lent, kept D. lent, keep
9. Have you found your English teacher_______?
A. still B. already C. yet D. ago
10. The workers wear glasses to keep their eyes ___.
A. safe B. safely C. to safe D. to be safe
11. Ten years ___ passed.
A. have B. has C. is D. are
12. His grandfather will die if he ___ a doctor.
A. sends for B. doesn't send for C. isn't send for D. won't send for
13.They ___ here since they ___ to China.
A. have lived, come B. have lived, comes C. have lived, came D. lived, came
14. Don't talk in class, ___?
A. do you B. will you C. are you D. shall we
15. The head master will return _____ two days
A. on B. at C. to D. in
16. Each of the stocking s ___ full of presents.
A. is B. are C. have D. has
17.___ Day and ___ Day are important for the students.
A. The Teachers', the Children's B. Teacher's, Children's
C. Teachers', Children D. Teachers', Children's
18. Would you please ___ on the blackboard?
A. don't draw B. not to draw C. not draw D. to not draw
19.The students ___ when the bell rang.
A. talking B. are talking C. were talking D. talked
20. Is there ___ in his talk?
A. something difficult B. difficult something C. difficult anything D. anything difficult

三、用括号内动词的正确形式填空。
1. The sun____ (go) down earlier in winter than in summer.
2. I _____ (write) a letter to my pen-friend yesterday.
3. Miss Gao _____ (teach) the students to sing an English song now.
4. The Greens _____ (stay) at home next Friday.
5. He _____ (tell) to return his book to the library yesterday morning.
6. I' d like you _____ (meet) my parents tomorrow evening.
7. There _____ (be) a lot of great changes in China since 1949.
8. The fridge is used for _____ (keep) food fresh.

四、根据中文提示,完成句子。
1. 他喜欢说不喜欢写.
He _______ speaking to ________.
2. 他说他讨厌乘飞机旅行.
He said that he _______ ________by air.
3. 在他小时候,他总是尝试新的实验
When he was a small child, he ________ always _______ out new ideas.
4. 我们好久没有收到他的来信了
We haven't ___________ __________him for a long time.
5. 他们上周都在为凯特的生日聚会担心
They ___________all__________ about Kate's birthday party last week.
6.老师让我们上课别说话
The teacher asked us ________ _________talk in class.
7.一定要让他准时还书
________ __________that he can return the book on time.
8.我已经把它写在这张纸上了
I've ________it_______ on this piece of paper already.
9.当我看到她们时,她们正在喂马。
They were _______ the horses some ________ when I saw them
10.活到老学到老。
You're _______ too ________ to learn.

五、阅读理解
A
Jack worked in an office in a small town. One day his boss said to him. " Jack, I want you to go Machester, to an office there, to see Mr Brown. Here's the address"
Jack went to Manchester. When he walked out of the railway station, he thought," The office isn't far from the station. I'll find it easily."
But after an hour he was still looking for it, so he stopped and asked an old woman. She said, "Go straight along this street, turn to the left at the end, and it's the second building on the right." Jack went and found it.
A few days later he went to the same city, but again he did not find the office, so he asked someone the way. It was the same old woman! She was astonished and said," Are you still looking for that place?"
1. Manchester is the name of ____.
A. a city B. a building C. a country D. a street
2. The boss wanted Jack to ___.
A. go to Machester B. go to his office C. send for Mr Brown D. visit Mr Brown
3. How did Jack go to Manchester?
A. By bus B. By train C. By car D. By plane
4. Jack left the station and ___.
A. found the office himself B. was led to the office
C. asked where Mr Brown was D. didn't know where he was
5. From the story we know ___.
A. Jack had a bad memory B. it was really difficult to find that place
C. Jack had never been to Manchester D. Jack was still looking for that place

B
Have you ever heard of the saying, "If you want a friend, be one."?
What does it mean? There are many different things that you can do to make friends.You may find out what they are if you watch someone make friends. Here is how one new teacher made friends with the students in her class on the first day of the school. When the bell rang, the teacher smiled at all the students. Then she said, "Good morning. How nice it is to have all of you in my class this year! I want to know each of you very much. I am sure we will enjoy working together. " The teacher smiled, used a pleasant voice , and acted in a friendly way. She told the students her name and wrote it on the blackboard. Then she told them something she liked to do and hoped to do with them during the year.The students knew that she liked many of the same things they liked. Everyone felt that she meant what she said. Each of them wanted to know her better and be her friend.Then she let the students tell something about themselves. So they felt that the teacher knew them.
Could you make friends as the teacher did? How do you know and like your classmates? One way is to find out more about them.During the break you can talk to them.You may ask them their names and the names of the schools they went to last year.They want to know about you, too.You may tell them about your interests or your holiday experiences.It is often easy to be friends with people who have the same interests and play the same games.As you talk, the others may be thinking, "I like to do the same things you do.It should be fun to be friends with you." Remember! Just talking together in a friendly way is one good way to make friends.
6. Which do you think is the best title for this passage?
A.Making Friends B.How to Talk to Others
C.A Talk in Class D.With the Teacher in Class
7. How did the teacher get the students to feel that she would be a good friend?
A.She laughed at each boy and girl and told them many things she knew.
B.She told the students many things she liked to do.
C.She laughed and made the students only to know her well in a friendly way.
D.She talked and acted in a friendly way to let the students know she really wanted to be friends with them.
8. If you want to make friends with others, you should ______ .
A.tell others as many things you like as possible during the break
B.try your best to show what you can do for them in class
C.talk with them to find out more about them in a friendly way
D.ask them to have dinner with you and play games with you after class
9. "Everyone felt that she meant what she said. "means that ______.
A.every student in her class felt that she really liked them
B.everyone in her class understood what the teacher said
C.all the students thought it was nothing telling them these
D.everybody felt tired when they heard what the teacher said

C
Scientists are trying to make the deserts into good land again. They want to bring water to the deserts, so people can live and grow food. They are learning a lot about the deserts. But more and more of the earth is becoming desert all the time. Scientists may not be able to change the desert in time.
Why is more and more land becoming desert? Scientists think that people make deserts. People are doing bad things to the earth.
Some places on the earth don't get very much rain. But they still don't become deserts. This is because some green plants are growing there. Small green plants and grass are very important to dry places. Plants don't let the hot sun make the earth even drier. Plants don't let the wind blow the dirt away. When a little bit of rain falls. The plants told the water. Without plants, the land can become a desert much more easily.
10. Deserts _________.
A. get very little rain
B. never have any plants or animals in them
C. can all be turned into good land before long
D. both A and B
11. Small green plants are very important to dry places because ___
A. they don't let the sun make the earth even drier
B. they don't let the wind blow the earth away
C. they hold water
D. all of the above
12. Land is becoming desert little by little because ___
A. plants can't grow there
B. there is not enough rain
C. people haven't done what scientists wish them to do
D. scientists know little about the deserts
13. Which is the main idea of the first paragraph?
A. Scientists know how to change desert into good land
B. Land is becoming desert faster than scientists can change it back into good land
C. If scientists can bring water to desert, people can live and grow food there.
D. More and more places are becoming deserts all the time.
14. After reading this, we learn that ___
A. plants can keep dry land from becoming desert
B. it is good to get rid of the grass in the deserts
C. all places without much rain will become deserts
D. it is better to grow crops on dry land than to grow grass

六、完型填空。
Dear Meimei,
Thank your for your last letter. I have been here more than a month 1 I left Shanghai for Tokyo. Now, let me tell you 2 about Tokyo. I enjoy 3 all places of great interest here very much. But it is difficult for me to find my way around the city. 4___ Tokyo, only the important streets have names, and houses are numbered by age(按年代编号).___5 , when the first house was built in a place, it was Number One, and the second was Number Two. Sometimes, the second house may be over a kilometer 6 from the first house. Most of the people here are 7 to tell other persons ways. One man even drew a 8___ for me when I asked him how I could 9 the station. How strange it is! Please write to _ 10 soon.

Yours,
Fangfang

( ) 1. A. when B. until C. since D. after
( ) 2. A. interesting something B. something interesting
C. anything interesting D. interesting anything
( ) 3. A. visit B. visiting C. to visit D. visits
( ) 4. A. In B. On C. At D. With
( ) 5. A. At times B. By the way C. From now on D. For example
( ) 6. A. far B. away C. wide D. long
( ) 7. A. happy B. angry C. sad D. sorry
( ) 8. A. pen B. book C. map D. bus
( ) 9. A. arrive B. reach to C. go D. get to
( ) 10. A. my B. I C. me D. mine

七、书面表达。仔细通读短文,用英语完成每个空格,每空只填一词。
One afternoon just before Christmas, an old kind man was walking in the street when he saw a little boy ___1___ in front of a beautiful shop window.The old man ___2____ why he was crying there. The little boy said that he had lost the ten dollars given by his mother.When the old man ___3____ this, he put his hand into his pocket and took ___4____ a small wallet and gave him ___5____ dollars.The little boy ____6___ him and stopped crying and smiled.The old man walked away.
An hour later, the old man was returning home by the same route(路线).To his surprise, he saw the same boy at the ___7___ place.He went up to him and asked if he had lost his money ____8____ .The little boy said that he had found the ____9_____ the dollars.He was waiting for him there.He wanted to ____10_____ back the ten dollars to him.
初三英语(上)期末练习题三答案
一、单词拼写。根据中文提示,填入正确的单词。
1. shoes 2. himself 3. happily 4. well 5. showing
6. left 7. useful 8. cheapest 9. Germans 10. fifth

二、单项选择
1. A
2. C 注意hardly这个词是含有否定意思的,相当于almost not,因此在反问的时候,应该用肯定句式。
3. A through是"穿过、穿越"的意思。
4.D some time:一些时间
5.D 宾语从句后接陈述句语序。如果答案C改成 " how I should do it"就对了。
6. C one of后接形容词的最高级和名词复数。
7. A be dead表示已经死亡的状态。
8. D for two days要与持续性动词keep连用.
9. C yet用语现在完成时的否定或疑问句式。
10.A keep + adj结构
11.B 一段时间作主语,视为单数。
12.B 该题为if所引导的条件状语从句,遵循主将(主句用一般将来时)从现(从句用一般现在时)的规则。
13.C since所引导的时间状语从句用过去式,主句用一般现在时。
14.B 请求或命令句式的反问句用will you.
15.D in+ 一段时间,表示这段时间之后,常用于一般将来时。
16.A Each做主语时,谓语动词常用单数。
17.D 教师节: Teachers' Day 儿童节:Children's Day
18.C Would you please not do sth
19.C 在过去的某一个时间点正在发生应该用过去进行时。
20.D 不定代词要放在修饰它的形容词前,因此首先排除B和C;由于该句为疑问句,因此只能用anything.

三、用括号内动词的正确形式填空。
1. goes 2. wrote 3. is teaching 4. will stay 5. was told
6. to meet 7. have been 8. keeping

四、根据中文提示,完成句子。
1. prefers, writing
2. hated traveling
3. was, trying
4. heard from
5. were, worried
6. not to
7. make sure
8. written, down
9. feeding, food
10. never, old

五、阅读理解
1.A " A few days later he went to the same city".
2.D " I want you to go Machester, to an office there, to see Mr Brown."
3.B " When he walked out of the railway station..."
4.D 此题采用排除法。A、B、C均不正确,因此D为最佳答案。
5.A 做法同上题。
6.A 通读全文可知,本文是在教读者如何与人为友。
7.D 只有D为最佳答案。选项A中的laugh at是"嘲笑、笑话"的意思。
8.C
9.A
10.D
11.D " Plants don't let the hot sun make the earth even drier. Plants don't let the wind blow the dirt away. When a little bit of rain falls. The plants told the water."
12.C " Scientists think that people make deserts. People are doing bad things to the earth."
13.B 从文章可以得知,科学家们是知道如何将沙漠变为良田的,只是改变速度不及人类毁坏的速度而已。
14.A 此题用排除法。
六、完型填空。
1.C 2.B 3.B 4.A 5.D 6.B 7.A 8.C 9.D 10.C
七、书面表达。仔细通读短文,用英语完成每个空格,每空只填一词。七、书面表达。仔细通读短文,用英语完成每个空格,每空只填一词。
1. crying 2. asked 3. heard 4. out 5. ten
6. thanked 7. same 8. again 9. lost 10. give

初三英语(上)期末练习题(一)
一、单词拼写。根据英文提示写出单词(第一个字母已经给出)。
1. p________ a child who is taught in school or privately
2. s ________ only one
3. d ________ make sth beautiful
4. l ________ fasten a door
5. s _______ collect or save sth for future use.
6. a ________ come into view, become visible
7. f ________ build sth.; establish
8. f ________ the land for farming
9. p _______ machine for printing
10. s _______ vehicle for traveling in space

二、选择填空。
1. The boy is too hungry, he has already eaten an apple, but he asks for_____ one.
A. the other B. other C. another D. others
2. It's going to rain. You'd better ____ there.
A. don't go B. to not go C. not to go D. not go
3. He spent much time ___ the work.
A. at B. in C. on D. for
4. Mr Green would like to meet the headmaster ___ 8:00 ___ 9:00 tomorrow morning.
A. from; to B. at; at C. between; and D. from; and
5. When ___ his uncle ____?
A. did; dead B. has; died C. did; die D. has; been dead
6. They ___ this city last week.
A. reached to B. got C. arrived D arrived in
7. English is a foreign language, but Chinese isn't a foreign language ______us.
A. to B. for C. of D. by
8. His father will be back from Berjing _______a month.
A. between B. after C. in D. for
9. He read nothing, _______he?
A. does B. doesn't C. did D. didn't
10. There's _____ milk in the bottle , is there?
A. little B. few C. a little D. a few
11.It is not so difficult ______ maths well.
A. learns B. to learn C. learning D. learned
12. Light _______ faster than sound .
A. was travelling B. is travelling C. travel D. travels
13. How long have you_____the library book
A. borrowed B. lent C. keeped D. kept
14. A: Have you _____spoken to an English man?
B: No, I've _____met a foreigner.
A. ever, ever B. never, never C. ever, never D. never, ever
15. A:Have you eaten your breakfast?
B: Yes, I ____it twenty-four minutes ago.
A. have had B. have eaten C. eated D. ate
16. A: How many times _____ you ______ ______ Japan ?
B: Several times.
A. have, been to B. have, gone to
C. have, been in D. have, been on
17. Do you know the boy _____two big eyes?
A. has B. with C. have D. in
18.Would you please________ it again?
A.speak B.talk C.say D.tell
19.The shop's _______ three years.
A. opened for B.opened since C.opening for D.been open for
20.The boy is weak ___ Chinese. But he is good _____ maths.
A.in...at B.at... in C.in... on D.on...in

三、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空.
1. This job can ______ quite quickly. (do)
2. _____ you _____ your homework yet? (finish)
3.That pen isn't yours. It's ______ .(her)
4.Can you help ______ with my English?(I)
5.Lin Lin is the ______ in our class.(young)
6. Who is _____________, Mike or Jack ? (tall)
7. We live on the ___________floor. (twenty)
8. English _____ in many countries today. (speak)
9. I ______ born on July 2nd, 1989. ( be)
10. You'd better ______ here as soon as possible. (leave)

四、补全对话。
1. -How are you? -I'm _______________.
2 . -Shall I call you Jim or James ? -It doesn't ___________.
3. -I didn't win in the sports meeting. -Bad __________.
4. -What does that word mean? -______________ one?
5. -I think foreign languages are more important than science.
-I really can't _________ with you.
6. -What were you doing at that time when your father came back yesterday?
-I was ___________ the floor.
7. -Thank you for your help. -That's all ____________.
8. -Have you found my ruler yet? -I'm __________ I haven't.
9. -Is Bill as tall as Li Lei? -No, he isn't _________ tall as Li Lei.
10. -Well _________. Congratulations. -Thank you.

五、句型转换。按要求填词完成句型转换。
A)在下面各题B句的每个空格里写上一个单词,使B句的意思与A句的相近。
1. A: My eyes started to fail at the age of seven.
B: My eyes started to fail when _________ _________ ________ _______ old.
2. A: He is so tired that he can't do anything else.
B: He is _____________ tired ___________ do anything else.
3. A: We'll remember Comrade Lei Feng for ever.
B: Comrade Lei Feng ________ _______ ______ by us for ever.
4. A: How expensive the car is !
B: ____________ ____________ expensive car it is!
5: A: We use computers in many ways.
B: Computers ____________ __________ in many ways.

B)按照下面各题的汉语意思用英语完成句子,把答案写在横线上,词数不限。
1.明天我们要尽力打赢这场足球赛。'
Tomorrow we will __________________________ to win the football game.
2.教师走进来时,学生们停止了谈话。
When the teacher came in, the students ______________________________.
3.我们的国家变得越来越强大了。
Our country has become __________________________________________.
4.他的画将于明天在我们学校展出。
His picture __________________________________ at our school tomorrow.
5.在昆明,我感到真像在家一样。
I really ____________________________________________in Kunming.

六、阅读理解
A
The war finally ended in 1945. During the next years, two great things happened-my dad came home from the army, and I was born! I was the first child, but I wasn't alone for long. In the next four years, my mother had three more boys.
It was great having a big family! The four of us were very close in age, so we played together all the time. We liked the game "policemen and thieves" best. It was exciting. Everybody always wanted to be a thief. Of course, someone had to be the policeman, and it was usually me.
Well, I have grown up now, but I still love the game. There is only one thing different. I'm a real policeman, Policeman Joe, so it's not a game any more.
判断下列句子是否符合短文内容。符合的用"T"表示;不符合的用"F"表示.
( ) 1. Joe's father was once a soldier.
( ) 2. During the war his father came back home.
( ) 3. Joe was the youngest child in the family.
( ) 4. He got on well with his brothers.
( ) 5. He always had to be the thief in the game.
( ) 6. Now he doesn't like the game any more.
B
Since the beginning of time, man has invented many interesting things. Some of these inventions, like numbers and the radio, have certainly changed history.
Since 1946, one of the most important inventions has been the computer. It will change all our lives.
The first computer was built at Harvard University(哈佛大学) in 1944. it was as large as a room and quite difficult and slow to operate(运行). But since the invention of the silicon chip(硅片), computer have become smaller, easier to use, and faster to operate. Some computers are as small as television sets. Some computers can be made smaller than a book. And computers are getting smaller all the time.
There are several reasons(原因) why computer is useful to us. First it can store(储藏) very, very large amount(数量) of information(信息). Second, the computer can operate very quickly. Third, modern computer can be built into other kinds of machines, like radios, cars, and planes. They can do a lot of work for us.
Soon, almost everyone, either at home or at work, will use some kind of computer. The lives of all of us will be changed by this invention.
( )1.According to(根据)this passage, many inventions have changed history and people's life.
( )2.The first computer was built in the middle of the 19th century(世纪).
( )3. A modern computer can be made smaller than silicon chip.
( )4. The computer has been made much better since the invention of the silicon chip.
( )5.The computer is useful because it can store lots of information, it can operate very quickly and can be built into other machines.

七、完型填空
One day a poor farmer was taking a bag of wheat to town. Suddenly the bag 1 from his horse onto the road. He did not know 2 to do about it because it was 3 heavy for him to lift by himself. He only hoped that someone would soon pass by and 4 him a hand.
Just at this moment a man 5 a horse came up to him. But the farmer's heart 6 when he saw who he was. It was the __7___ man living nearby . The farmer had hoped to ask another farmer or a poor man like him to come along and help him. He couldn't ask such a great man to help him. But to his 8 , the great man got off his horse as soon as he came nearer. He said to the farmer, "I see you 9 help, friend. How good it is that I'm here just at he right time." Then he took one end of the bag, the farmer took the other, they together raised it and put it on the horse.
"Sir," asked the farmer, "how can I pay you?"
"It's quite easy." The great man replied with 10 .
"Wherever you see anyone else in trouble, do the same for him."
( ) 1. A. fall B. fell C. falling D. fallen
( ) 2. A. what B. how C. that D. it
( ) 3. A. very B. so C. quite D. too
( ) 4. A. lend B. ask C. borrow D. gave
( ) 5. A. riding B. ride C. rode D. rides
( ) 6. A. falls B. sinks C. sank D. rose
( ) 7. A. poor B. great C. good D. bad
( ) 8. A. surprised B. surprising C. surprise D. surprises
( ) 9. A. needs B. need C. to need D. needed
( ) 10. A. smiles B. smile C. a smile D. an smile

八、阅读对话,并根据对话内容填词、词组或句子,使对话后的短文通顺正确。
A: Good morning, Dick.
B: Good morning, Jim. Come in, please.
A: Thank you. Your room is very nice. Oh! A bookshelf and many books. I know why you study so well then.
B: Thank you. I like reading, you know.
A: Did you do well in your exam?
B: Yes. I just learned I passed the English exam and the result is good. I have got an "A".
A: Congratulations!
B: Thank you. But you look worried today. Why?
A: We will have a maths exam next Monday. I'm afraid I may fail the exam. So I've come for some help.
B: Don't worry. I am good at it and I can help you with it.
A: That's great. Thank you very much.
B: Not at all. It was a pleasure. A friend in need is a friend indeed.
A: That's true. When shall we start?
B: Right now.

Dick was a good pupil. He liked ___________ very much and there were a lot of books in his room. He was better at his lessons ___________ his friend, Jim. He studied quite well. He had just ___________ the English exam and the result was quite good. He had got an "A". Jim ___________ his maths exam next Monday. He was afraid that he might ___________. So he went to Dick for some help. He wanted Dick very much to help him ___________ his maths. Dick would like to help him at once and said that a friend in need ___________ a friend in deed.
初三英语(上)期末练习题(一)答案
一、 单词拼写。根据英文提示写出单词(第一个字母已经给出)。
1. pupil 2. single 3. decorate 4. lock 5. store
6. appear 7. found 8. farmland 9. printer 10. spaceship
二、 选择填空。
1. C 在原有的基础上再加一,用another
2. D You'd better后接不带to的动词不定式,否定形式直接在动词原形前加not.
3. C " spend...on":在...上花费(时间/金钱)
4. C " between...and...":在...之间
5. C 此题是一个一般过去时的句子。
6. D
7. A "...to us":对我们来说
8. C " in a month":一个月以后.
9. C 本题的考点是反意疑问句。nothing是一个否定词,因此后半句应该用肯定句。read在该题中是read的过去形式,因此用did来反问。
10. A 本题也是反意疑问句。从后半句能看出,前半句应该是一个否定句。修饰不可数名词的否定词是little.
11. B It is...做形式主语,动词不定式做真正的主语。
12. D 表示客观科学真理的句子要用一般现在时。
13. D How long是指一段时间,因此应该用持续性的动词。
14. C ever:曾经; never:从来没有
15. D 从答语的ago来看,应该用一般过去式。
16. A "曾经去过 ":have been to
17. B 此空不能再填入动词,需要一个介词。"长着两只大眼睛的"用介词with.
18. C say后面常接所说的内容。该题中的it就是指代所说 的内容。
19. D 此题是一个被动语态 的现在完成时,结构是have( has) been done. 而open在该句中用作形容词,表示状态。
20. A be weak in:在某方面比较弱; be good at:擅长,在某方面有优势。
三、用括号内所给词的适当形式填空.
1. be done 2. Have , finished 3. hers 4. me 5. youngest
6. taller 7. twentieth 8. is spoken 9. was 10. leave
四、补全对话。
1. fine 2. matter 3. luck 4. Which 5. agree
6. sweeping 7. right 8. sorry 9. so/ as 10. done
五、句型转换。按要求填词完成句型转换。
A)在下面各题B句的每个空格里写上一个单词,使B句的意思与A句的相近。
1. I was seven years
2. too, to
3. will be remembered
4. What an
5. are used
B)按照下面各题的汉语意思用英语完成句子,把答案写在横线上,词数不限。
1. try our best
2. stopped talking
3. stronger and stronger
4. will be on shown
5. felt at home when I was
六、阅读理解
A
1. T
2. F " The war finally ended in 1945. During the next years, two great things happened-my dad came home from the army, and I was born!" "我"爸爸是在战争结束之后回来的。
3. F "我"即Joe是家中的长子。
4.T " It was great having a big family! The four of us were very close in age, so we played together all the time."
5. F Of course, someone had to be the policeman, and it was usually me.
B
1. T
2. F " The first computer was built at Harvard University in 1944."
3. F 自从有了硅片,计算机才开始变的越来越小,而不是变得比硅片还小。
4. T
5. T
七、完型填空
1. B 此空应该用一般过去时。Fall的过去形式为fell.
2. B how to do about it:该怎样去做
3. D too...to:太...而不能
4. A 给某人以帮助:give sb a hand或lend sb a hand. 由于是跟在would的后面,因此应该用原形,所以排除D,只能选A.
5. A 现在分词表示伴随。
6.C 从上下文来看,这个农夫 的心"沉了下去"。sink的过去式是sank.
7. B 往后看可以判断出来,过来的人是一个great man.
8. C to one's surprise: 使某人吃惊的是...
9. B see sb do sth:看见某人做某事。
10.C With a smile:面带微笑地
八、阅读对话,并根据对话内容填词、词组或句子,使对话后的短文通顺正确。
1. reading 2. than 3. passed 4. would take 5. fail 6. with 7. was

初三英语寒假练习二
二、单项填空(共20分,每小题1分)
从A,B,C,D四个选项中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。
( )21.My mother is taller than _______ teacher.
A.hers B.him C.himself D.his
( )22.Macao is ______ the west of Hong Kong and ________ the south of China.
A.to, to B.to, in C.on, in D.in, in
( )23.I remember _______ your raincoat here yesterday.
A.bring B.to bring C.bringing D.brought
( )24.I think it is the best of all. Do you _______ me?
A.go on with B.catch up with C.think of D.agree with
( )25.She had two of her ________ taken out last week.
A.teeth B.tooth C.one tooth D.two teeth
( )26.She asked me ________ before liberation.
A.when was I born B.where I was born
C.if was I born D.which year was I born
( )27.Would you please ________ the door for me?
A.to close B.closing C.close D.closed
( )28.I can do the work more ________ Bill.
A.careful than B.careful as C.carefully as D.carefully than
( )29.You don't look well. Why _______ to see the doctor?
A.not to go B.you not to go C.not go D.didn't go
( )30.It's not difficult for me _______ English well.
A.with learning B.learning C.learn D.to learn
( )31.The number of the trees in the world _______ getting smaller and smaller.
A.is B.are C.was D.were
( )32.There is only one chair in the room. _______ you ________ he can sit on it.
A.Both...and B.Not only...but also C.Either...or D.Neither...nor
( )33.They are quite a _______ team. They have won lots of medals.
A.weak B.strong C.sad D.hard
( )34.Every day he listens to the radio for _________.
A.one and a half hours B.an hour and half
C.one and half hour D.one and a half hour
( )35.His grandmother ________ for more than ten years.
A.died B.has been dead C.dies D.has died
( )36.Last month it was _______ to visit the factory.
A.we turn B.us turn C.our turn D.ourselves turn
( )37.If you have ________ to do, you needn't come this afternoon.
A.important anything B.something important
C.everything important D.important nothing
( )38.Everyone is here, _______?
A.aren't they B.aren't you C.isn't it D.isn't one
( )39.I don't know if he _______ tomorrow. If he _______, I will meet him.
A.will come; comes B.comes; comes
C.will come; will come D.comes; will come
( )40."Could I borrow your bike, please? Mine has just broken." "_________".
A.It's kind of you. B.You are welcome.
C.It doesn't' matter. D.Of course. With pleasure.

三、阅读理解(共30分,每小题2分)
阅读下面短文,根据其内容从各题所给的四个选项中,选择最佳答案。
A
Emily Mason and George Peters were good friends, though they sometimes fought over toys or quarreled (吵架) about what game they would play. As they grew older, they played together less. They almost stopped speaking to each other, not because they had disagreed with each other about anything, but just because they belonged to different groups. For one thing, Emily was developing into a very good student, while George was more interested in sports. Emily had begun to study French, and she liked French so much that she began to write short plays in French. She also liked television programmes, and for some reason, she enjoyed watching football games very much. Her mother used to say, "Emily, I've never heard of a girl who likes football as much as you do." Mrs. Mason simply did not approve of (赞同) her daughter's interest.
While Emily was working on her French lessons or watching football games on TV, George was working for his father in his store after school. He liked selling things to people. Mr. Peters found George so helpful that he thought about offering him a higher pay.
In fact, it was football that brought Emily and George back together. When George was going home one afternoon, he looked in the window of Emily's living-room and he saw that she was watching a football game on TV. He walked up and knocked at the door. Emily was surprised to see him, but she asked him to come in, and they watched the rest of the game together. Emily and George are good friends again. They still have different ideas about things sometimes, but they agree with each other that football is the world's best game. Mrs. Mason doesn't seem to disapprove of her daughter's interest in football as much as she used to.

( )41.When they grew older, __________.
A.Emily worked in a store B.Emily became a good student
C.George began to learn French D.George wrote short plays in French
( )42.While Emily was watching football games on TV, George was _________.
A.working on his French lessons B.running a store
B.working part-time for his father D.in charge of a sports team
( )43.Which of the following is NOT TRUE?
A.Football made Emily and George good friends again.
B.Emily and George both agree football is the world's best game.
C.George was a good helper to his father.
D.Mrs. Mason approves of her daughter's interest in football now.

B
One afternoon, Kate and her brother Bob went out to play. Kate was eight, and Bob was ten. "Let's go to the bridge and we can see fish in the river," said Kate.
"I don't know...," Bob said. "Mum told us, it's dangerous."
Kate said, "I am not afraid. Are you?"
They walked onto the bridge and began looking for fish in the river. The bridge was a train bridge. Trains went over the bridge three times a day.
The children were standing in the middle of the bridge when they heard a loud noise. "A train is coming!" Bob shouted. "Run!" He ran to the end of the bridge. He was safe.
Kate ran, too, but she fell. The train was coming fast. Kate ran towards Bob. She fell again right on the train tracks (铁轨). There was no time to leave. She had to lie down between the tracks. A few seconds later, the train went over the girl, but she was not hurt at all. She stood up and said to Bob, "Don't tell Mum! Don't tell Mum!"
At last their mother found out about the story. She was angry because they went on the bridge. But she was happy that Kate was all right.

( )44.When the train came, the children were _______.
A.in the middle of the bridge B.at the end of the bridge
C.on their way to the bridge D.away from the bridge
( )45.Where was Kate when the train was going over her?





( )46.When their mother knew about the story, she was ________.
A.happy B.angry and sad C.sorry D.both angry and happy

C
Johnny Smith was a good math student at a high school. He loved his computer. He came home early every day, then he worked with it till midnight. But Johnny was not a good English student, not good at all. He got an F in his English class. One day after school, Johnny joined his computer to the computer in his high school office. The school office computer had the grades of all the students: the math grades, the science grades, the science grades, the grades in arts and music, and the grades in English. He found his English grade. An F! Johnny changed his English grade from an F to an A. Johnny's parents looked at his report card. They were very happy. "An A in English!" said Johnny's Dad. "You're a very clever boy, Johnny."
Johnny is a backer (黑客). Hackers know how to take information (信息) from other computers and put new information in. Using a modem (调制解调器), they join their computers to other computers secretly (秘密地). School headmasters and teachers are worried about hackers. So are the police, for some people even take money from bank computer accounts (账户) and put it into their own ones. And they never have to leave home to do it! They are called hackers.
( )47.Johnny changed his English grade with the computer in ________.
A.the classroom B.the school office
C.a bank near his house D.his own house
( )48.When Johnny's parents saw the report, they were happy because _______.
A.Johnny was good at math
B.Johnny loved computers
C.johnny could join one computer to another
D.they thought Johnny was not poor in English any longer
( )49.Who are worried about hackers in the story?
A.Johnny's parents.
B.School headmasters, teachers and the police.
C.The police.
D.School headmasters and teachers.
( )50.What should the hackers know well, do you think, after you read this story?
A.Information. B.Bank computer accounts.
C.Computers. D.Grades.

D
Is there a strange something high up in the world's tallest mountains? If so, is it a big bear (熊)? Is it a monkey? Or is it a kind of man?
No one knows. This mystery (谜) has puzzled (困惑) the world for years.
In 1887, a mountain climber found large footprints (脚印) in the snow. They looked like the footprints of a very large man. But men don't walk without shoes in the snow!
In 1906, another climber saw more than footprints. Far off, he saw a very large animal standing on two legs. As he watched, it ran very quickly.
Fifteen years later, newspaper had new stories about the "something". A mountain climber said he had seen the "snow man" walk slowly across the snow, far below him. He said it looked like a very large man.
From then on, more and more people had stories to tell. But not until 1951 did a mountain climber bring back pictures of large footprints. The pictures showed clearly that the snowman walked on two legs. Could it be an ape (猿) man? The mystery grew! Someday we may find out just what it is that makes the large footprints.
( )51.The passage is about _______.
A.some mountain climbers
B.some strange animals
C.some large footprints
D.the mystery of the snowman
( )52.Why were people interested in the footprints?
A.They were footprints of large bear.
B.They looked like the footprints of a large man.
C.They were found in the snow.
D.They were found in the world's tallest mountains.
( )53.The pictures of large footprints were taken by a mountain climber in ________.
A.1887 B.1906 C.1921 D.1951
( )54.Why did the mystery grow when a mountain climber brought back pictures of large footprints?
A.They were footprints of an ape man.
B.They were footprints of a snowman.
C.The pictures showed clearly how the snowman walked.
D.The pictures showed clearly how an ape man walked on two legs.
( )55.Since a mountain climber first found the large footprints in the snow, the mystery of the snowman has puzzled the world for _________ years.
A.one hundred and fifteen B.ninety-five C.eighty D.fifty

四、完形填空(共20分,每小题1分)
A
Jane's grandmother is very busy. Whenever Jane ___56___ her grandmother, they might have a sandwich before running to the latest star show at the photography exhibit. Jane's grandmother had been interested in photography for a while. Now, it ___57___, she's interested in animals. Or ___58___ Dad says.
Jane thought her grandmother. "Her work keeps her ___59___ enough. Kate's grandmother ___60___ her good meals, and Tom's grandmother just bought him a new pair of shoes. But I ___61___ sandwiches and lessons on stars! -Oh, ___62___. I guess I'd better call and see what she wants to do. ___63___ she'll take me to the zoo."
A few minutes ___64___, Jane hung up the phone. Then she ran to her father, ___65___, "Dad! Dad! Grandma's going to Africa, and she wants me to go with her!"
( )56.A.phoned B.visited C.remembered D.heard
( )57.A.says B.reads C.seems D.likes
( )58.A.neither B.nor C.so D.then
( )59.A.quiet B.angry C.healthy D.busy
( )60.A.buys B.cooks C.finds D.asks
( )61.A.bring B.eat C.get D.save
( )62.A.hooray B.hi C.hello D.well
( )63.A.Maybe B.Certainly C.Luckily D.Suddenly
( )64.A.ago B.later C.before D.after
( )65.A.hurrying B.shouting C.guessing D.wishing

B
Farley worked for the Canadian government. One day, he was ___66___ to learn more about wolves. Do wolves kiss lots of caribou (big animals)? Do they kill people?
They gave him lots of food and clothes and guns. Then they put him on a plane and took him to a ___67___. The plane put him down and went away. There were no houses or people in this place. But there were lots of animals and lots of wolves.
People tell terrible stories about wolves. They say wolves like to kill and eat people. Farley remembered these stories, and he was ___68___. He had his gun with him ___69___.
One day, he saw a group of wolves. Farley watched these wolves every day. The mother was a very ___70___ mother. She gave milk to her babies. She gave them lessons about life. They learned how to ___71___ food. The father wolf got food for the mother. The young wolf ___72___ the children. They were a nice, happy family--a wolf family Farley did not need his ___73___ any more. In a short time, he got on well with the wolf family. He learned many new things about wolves. He learned that many stories about the wolves were ___74___. Wolves do not eat people, and they do not eat many large animals.
Later, Farley wrote a bood about wolves. He wanted people to ___75___ them.
( )66.A.seen B.told C.heard D.found
( )67.A.small town B.big city C.far place D.lonely village
( )68.A.afraid B.happy C.angry D.tired
( )69.A.at times B.all the time C.once a week D.every afternoon
( )70.A.bad B.good C.hungry D.thirsty
( )71.A.cook B.make C.get D.pick
( )72.A.shouted B.looked into C.laughed at D.played with
( )73.A.food B.clothes C.gun D.plane
( )74.A.not good B.not true C.not easy D.not clear
( )75.A.grow B.have C.teach D.understand

五、单词拼写(共10分,每小题1分)
根据句意,补全单词中所缺的字母。
( )76.The town is small. You can't find it on the m__ __.
( )77.Old people often walk with a s__ __ck.
( )78.There are f__ __ __y students here: twenty-two boys and twenty-eight girls.
( )79.Mr Smith often works in his g__ __d__ __. There are many flowers in it.
( )80.English has become very useful in the m__d__ __ __ world.
( )81.Take this m__ __ __ __ __ __ __ twice a day and you'll be better.
( )82.Spring festival often falls in J__n__ __ __ __ or February.
( )83.The more carefully you do exercises, the f__ __er mistakes you'll make.
( )84.What were you doing when the b__ __ __ rang at the beginning of the class?
( )85.Chinese names are d__ff__ __ __ __ __ from English names.

六、补全对话(共10分,每小题1分)
根据对话内容,在每个空白处填入一个适当的词使对话完整,合乎情景。
Doctor: What's (86) ________ with you, young man?
Paul: I don't feel (87) _______.
Doctor: I'm (88) _______ to hear that. Please take (89) _______ your shirt and (90) _______ down on the bed.
Paul: Yes, doctor.
Doctor: Well, there's (91) ________ much wrong with you. Do you take much exercise?
Paul: No, doctor. I never have (92) _______ time for exercise.
Doctor: How do you sleep?
Paul: Very badly, doctor. Can you give me (93) _______ medicine to help me sleep?
Doctor: Yes, I can. But you don't need medicine. Just take more exercise.
Paul: You're right. It's important to (94) _______ healthy. Thank you for your advice.
Doctor: You're welcome. I (95)________ you will be better soon.

七、完成句子(共15分,每小题1分)
根据中文意思完成下列句子。每空只填一词,缩写词算一词。
96.感谢你对我日语方面的帮助。
Thank you _______ ________ me ________ my Japanese.
97.他年纪太大不能干重活。
He is ________ old _______ do the hard work.
98.昨天杰克花十元买了那本书。
Jack ______ ten yuan ______ that book yesterday.
99.中华人民共和国成立五十多年了。
The PRC _______ ________ over fifty years.
100.如果不努力学习,你就会落后于其他同学。
If you don't study hard, you ______ ________ _________ other students.
101.看电视太多对眼睛有害。
Watching TV too much ________ ________ _________ your eyes.

八、书面表达(共15分)
根据中文意思和英文提示的词语,写出意思连贯,符合逻辑的英文文段。(50-70词)所给英文提示词语必须都用上;中文提示内容不必逐句翻译。
桑兰是我国最优秀的运动员之一。在一次比赛中她受了重伤,至今不能站起来,但是她勇敢地......现在她......
athlete (运动员), be hurt, contest (比赛), so far, stand, face, the facts (现实), overcome (克服), study, try one's best, a useful person
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________


参考答案
一、听力(略)
二、单项填空
21.D 22.B 23.C 24.D 25.A 26.B 27.C 28.D 29.C 30.D
31.A 32.C 33.B 34.A 35.B 36.C 37.B 38.A 39.A 40.D
三、阅读理解
41.B 42.C 43.D 44.A 45.B 46.D 47.D 48.D 49.B 50.C 51.D 52.B 53.D 54.C 55.A
四、完形填空
56.B 57.C 58.C 59.D 60.B 61.C 62.D 63.A 64.B 65.B 66.B 67.C 68.A 69.B 70.B 71.C 72.D 73.C 74.B 75.D
五、单词拼写
76.map 77.stick 78.fifty 79.garden 80.modern 81.medicine 82.January 83.fewer 84.bell 85.different
六、补全对话
86.wrong 87.well 88.sorry 89.off 90.lie / sit 91.nothing 92.any / enough / much 93.some 94.keep / be 95.hope
七、完成句子
96.for helping, with 97.too, to 98.paid, for / spent, on / (in) buying 99.was founded 100.will fall behind 101.is bad for
八、书面表达
Sang Lan is one of the best athletes in our country, She was hurt badly in a contest. So she can't stand up, but she faces the facts bravely and overcomes all kinds of the difficulties. Now she is studying hard and trying her best to be a useful person to the county.

初三英语寒假练习一
笔试部分(80分)
I.选择填空(15分)
( )1. If it doesn't rain tomorrow, I ______ fishing.
A. go B. went C. going D. will go
( )2. Thomas Edison was the man ______ never gave up.
A. who B. what C. he D. it
( )3. Andrew is speaking too quickly.
Let's ask him to speak more______.
A. quick B. slow C. quickly D. slowly
( )4. I want to learn ______ healthily.
A. to eat how B. to how eat
C. how to eat D. how eat to
( )5. Saint Nicholas wanted to give money to______ .
A. rich B. poor C. the rich D. the poor
( )6. Children wake up very early, and ______ open the presents.
A. can't B. don't
C. can't wait to D. aren't waiting for
( )7. As China is a big country, people in different ______ celebrate this holiday in different ways.
A. countries B. places C. clothes D. ways
( )8. That night Mary gave ______ to this very special boy.
A. bear B. born C. birth D. birthday
( )9. She has nothing______.
A. say B. says C. to say D. is said
( )10. A brush pen ______ for writing.
A. uses B. used C. is used D. is using
( )11. But it is also used very widely ______ a foreign language in many other countries of the world.
A. as B. when C. because D. for
( )12. So these eggs were ______ long long ago by Dinosaurs!
A. laid B. seen C. found D. broken
( )13. How long have you ______ up?
A. got B. get C. been D. be
( )14. Water the young trees, as______ as possible.
A. much B. many C. long D. often
( )15. ______ the satellites' help China can send its TV and radio programmes to the other side of the world.
A. With B. Under C. Have D. Use
II. 完形填空(15分)
先阅读短文,然后从文后每小题的四个选项中选出一个可以填入短文中相应空白处的正确答案.
Jenny was often late 1 school. One morning, when she earn in late, Mr. Black, her teacher, got angry. "I'1 2 your father if you aren't 3 on time tomorrow, " he told her.
The next day she got up very 4 and went to school without breakfast. When the bell rang, she 5 in her seat. The door opened and the teacher came in. But 6 wasn't Mr. Black. It was Miss Green. Mr. Black was ill 7 she was taking his class instead. 8 disappointed Jenny was!
The next morning Jenny got up 9 earlier. 10 she got to the school gate, she stopped. On the ground there was a wallet.
She 11 it up. " 12 is this?" she wondered.
As she stood there, she heard the first bell. "What shall I do?" she asked 13 "I'll turn it in first, " she decided. And so she 14 .
When she hurried into her classroom, Mr. Black 15 begun his lesson.
( )1. A. to B. for C. from D. at
( )2. A. write for B. write C. write to D. write with
( )3. A. here B. there C. in D. out
( )4. A. early B. earlier C. earliest D. much early
( )5. A. wait B. waited C. is waiting D. was waiting
( )6. A. he B. it C. what D. who
( )7. A. and B. or C. but D. so
( )8. A. How B. What C. Why D. Who
( )9. A. very B. too C. even D. more
( )10. A. Right now B. Before just C. Just after D. Just before
( )11. A. put B. picked C. got D. stood
( )12. A. What B. Who C. Whose D. Which
( )13. A. herself B. her C. hers D. she
( )14. A. turn B. turned C. does D. did
( )15. A. is B. has C. had D. was
III. 阅读理解(20分)
先阅读短文,然后根据短文内容从文后每小题的四个选项中,选出一个能完成所给句子或回答所提问题的正确答案.

(A)
April 1,2000
Dear Francis,
I received your very nice Christmas card nearly one and one - half years ago. I am sorry it has taken me so long to tell you how happy I was to hear from you! I will always remember how beautiful you sang at the very special China culture night the summer of 1998.

When I came back from China wanted to learn more studies. I was accepted at the university of Texas and have been a student there for almost three semesters. To graduate, I must study a foreign language for four semesters. I would like to learn Chinese but they do not teach it there, so I would have to go to a different university. I have a Chinese friend, Jing, in my biology class. She is very nice.

This week a bad tornado struck the town where my daughter works but she was not hurt. It did nearly $500, 000, 000 of destruction but less than 10 people were killed. We are happy about that.

None of the teachers who went to China, at least to Jingzhou, knew each other before going. However, being together made us friends. Last week was spring break from school. I flew to the home of Polly and Lois in Minnesota, about 2400 kilometres from me, to visit and to talk about how much we missed China and all our friends there. Do you remember them? They said Andy had been to visit them. He came to watch a basketball game between his state, Wisconsin, and Minnesota. They told me if he can get enough money, he will go back to China this summer. Polly has a newspaper route to help earn money to go to China each summer. She walks from house to house to deliver the newspapers so she will be used to walking when she gets to China. While I was there, I helped her.

My husband and I have four children, three girls and one boy. Our boy is not married He is 26 years old and works as a computer analyst Our youngest daughter is staying home from work since she had her baby boy six months ago. He is very chubby and happy.

Did you get married yet? Do you have good students this year?

I think maybe I did write to both you and your student of 1998 named Wang Feng. If I did, please, forgive me for forgetting. So many people from China wrote to me, I can't remember who I answered. I would love to hear from you.

Your friend,

Mary - Jo Stevenson

( )1. Francis wrote to his friend in ______ .
A. April,1998 B. April,1999
C. November,1998 D. November,1999
( )2. ______ would like to learn Chinese.
A. Jing B. Polly any and Lois
C. Wang Feng D. Mary - Jo
( )3. This week the writer is happy about______.
A. The daughter is all right.
B. The daughter has $500,000,000.
C. The daughter is married
D. The daughter has a baby boy.
( )4. There was a ball game in______ .
A. Texas B. Jingzhou C. Wisconsin D. Minnesota
( )5. ______ doesn't work now.
A. Andy B. Franis C. Her girl D. Her boy

(B)
Think about the last time you dropped a stone into water. Do you remember how the waves started? They began where the stone met the water and then moved outward.

Just as waves in water take time to move, so sound takes time to move in air. Sound takes time to travel.
Perhaps you have noticed the time that passes between a flash of lightning and the thunder. You may have heard the sound of a baseball bat hitting a ball an instant after you saw it happen.

Both light and sound take time to travel. However, there is a great deal of difference in their speed. In one second, sound can travel about 1, 000 feet through air. During this same time, light can travel move than 186, 000 miles!

When something makes a sound some distance away, you can often see the action before you hear the sound. As sound travels, vibrations are passed on from one molecule to another. The farther the sound has to travel, the longer it takes.

( )1. Which of these is wrong?
A. "Sound and wave" mean"水花和水波".
B. "Lightning and thunder" mean"闪电和雷声".
C. "Instant and second" mean"瞬息和秒钟".
D. "Action and vibration" mean"动作和振动".
( )2. Sound takes time to move in air just as______.
A. waves B. trains C. buses D. cars
( )3. When we drop a stone into water, we can see ______.
A. nothing
B. the waves start where the stone meets the water and then move outward
C. the waves start far from the stone
D. both A and C
( )4. Which of these is right?
A. You may hear the sound of a baseball bat hitting a ball, then see the action.
B. You may hear the thunder before you see a flash of lightning.
C. Light takes no time to travel.
D. The farther the light has to travel, the longer it takes.
( )5. Which of these is not right?
A. In one second, sound can travel about 340 metres through air.
B. In one second, light can travel about 300,000,000 metres.
C. One foot is longer than one metre.
D. One metres is shorter than one miles.
IV. 句型转换(10分)
1. The boy was too frightened to move,(变复合句)
→The boy was ______ frightened ______ ______ ______ move.
2. Santa Claus comes from a real person in history. (变同义句)
→ ______ Christmas ______ ______ ______ a real person in history.
3. We wondered whom we should ask. (变简单句)
→We wanted ______ ______ ______ ______ ask.
4. They grow rice in South China. (变被动句)
→______ ______ ______ by______ in South China.
5. What do forests help to do? (完成答语)
→They help to ______ water______ ______ ______ .
V. 句意填空(5分)
1. D______ his lifetime, he had l, 093 inventions.
2. You may become f______, and at times you'11 feel like giving up.
3. In w_____ countries the most important holiday is Christmas.
4. More than 6,000 l_______ are spoken in the world today.
5. The PRC was f_____ on October 1,1949.
VI. 书面表达(15分)
要求提示:怎样栽一棵树?
1. 地面正好合适,即既不太湿,也不太干.
2. 为了树挖一个大洞.
3. 把一根长的、结实的棍子插在洞旁的泥土里.
4. 把树放入洞里.
5. 把泥土放回洞里.
6. 把树系到棍子顶端.
7. 给它浇好水.
参考词语:①be planted ②neither...nor...
③be dug ④be knocked into...
⑤be put in the hole ⑥be put back
⑦be tied to... ⑧be watered well

参考答案
笔试部分
I. 1-5 D A D C D 6-10 C B C C C 11-15 A A C D A
II. B C A A D B D A C D B C A D C
III. (A)C D A D C (B)A A B D C
IV. 1. so that he couldn't 2. Faher is based on
3. to know whom to 4. Rice is grown them
5. keep from running away
V. 1. During 2. frustrated 3. western 4. languages 5. founded
VI. 略

期中复习 ( Unit 1- 6 )
一、本阶段短语小结
Unit 1
1. have got 有
2. at the moment现在,此时
3. five minutes ago五分钟之前
4. used to过去经常
5. for a while一会儿
6. walk away with sth. 带着某物离开
7. leave for some place前往某地
8. sooner or later迟早
9. be missing丢失
10. pay for赔偿
11. come up with an idea想到一个办法
12. return . . . to把...归还给...
13. be abroad 在国外
14. think of想到
Unit 2
1. have a try试一试
2. all over the world全世界
3. be famous for因...而著名
4. large numbers of大量的
5. neither... nor... 既不...也不...
6. all the year round一年四季
7. no matter what无论什么
8. for example例如
9. give up放弃
10. make sb. fit使人健康
11. by the way顺便说一下
12. be with sb. 和某人在一起
13. on business出差
14. so far到目前为止
15. come true实现
16. set off出发、动身
17. step into进入
18. slow down减速
19. go on doing继续做某事
20. wait for等候
21. be proud of为...而骄傲
22. speak highly of高度赞扬
23. not only... but also... 不仅...而且...
Unit 3
1. pour... into... 把...倒入...
2. be afraid of害怕
3. a year and a half一年半
4. half a year半年
5. a piece of beautiful music一段优美的音乐
6. pick up捡起,拾起
7. as soon as一...就...
8. keep... clean保持...干净
9. take care of照顾
10. cut down砍伐
11. something useful有用的事
12. make a contribution to作贡献
13. base on以...为根据
14. make sure弄清楚、查明
15. take away带走
16. begin with以...开始
Unit 4
1. right now目前、现在
2. as soon as possible尽可能快地
3. be free有空的
4. leave a message留话
5. take a taxi乘出租车
6. all kinds of things各种各样的东西
7. sleeping car卧铺车厢
8. walk around四处走动
9. talk with sb. 与某人交谈
10. fall asleep睡着
11. wake up醒来、叫醒
12. go on a trip旅行
13. have a good time玩的愉快
14. take photos拍照
15. come out冲洗出来(影片)
Unit 5
1. come on加油、赶快
2. have a family meeting召开家庭会议
3. talk about谈论...
4. go for a holiday去渡假
5. go scuba diving去潜水
6. write down写下、记下
7. by oneself独自、单独
8. walk along沿着...走
9. no matter if不管、无论
10. get a chance to do sth得到一个做某事的机会.
11. have a wonderful time玩的愉快
12. book a room订一个房间
Unit 6
1. have an accident 出事故
2. under the sea在海底
3. allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事
4. make it possible使它变成可能
5. be interested in对...感兴趣
6. use sth. to do sth.用...去做...
7. make a TV show制作电视片
8. be amazed at对...感到惊讶
9. take part in参加
10. feed on以...为食
11. get out of从...中出来
二、本阶段语法小结
1. 宾语从句
句子的宾语由一个完整的句子来充当的复合句叫宾语从句。
句型: 主 + 谓 + 引导词 + 宾语从句
eg: He said he would go to Beijing tomorrow. 他说明天要去北京。
I don't know who borrowed my bike. 我不知道谁借走了我的自行车。
① 连接宾语从句的连词有that,(that在口语中常省略)whether, if和连接代词what, which, who, whom及连接副词when, where, how, why, 学习宾语从句的关键要抓以下几点:
(that- 不担任成份,无词义,可省略;
if- 不担任成份,有词义,不可省略
wh- 担任成份,有词义,不可省略)
② 时态的一致:即主句的时态与从句时态的一致。
宾语从句中如果主句是现在的时态(即指一般现在时,现在进行时,现在完成时)从句的时态可根据实际情况而定。
eg: I tell him that I will go to Beijing tomorrow. 我告诉他我明天要去北京。
I tell him I bought a new bike yesterday. 我告诉他我昨天买了一辆新自行车。
I have head that he will come. 我已经听说他要来。
宾语从句中如果主句是过去的时态(指一般过去时,过去进行时)那么从句的时态要用相应的过去进态(一般过去时,过去进行时,过去将来时,过去完成时)。
eg: I knew where he lived. 我知道他住在哪里。
He said he had seen the film. 他说他已经看过电影了。
He asked me if everybody was here. 他问我那里是否有人。
时态补充:
注意:如果从句所表述的是一个客观真理,那么不管主句的谓语动词是什么时态,从句的谓语动词一律用一般现在时。
eg: The teacher told us that the sun rises from the east. 老师告诉我们太阳从东方升起。
③ 语序的变化:在宾语从句中,无论从句是陈述名还是疑问句都统统要求用陈述句语序来表达。
陈述句变为宾语从句时,语序不变。
eg: 陈述句:He is an honest man.
宾从:I said (that) he was an honest man.
一般疑问句变为宾语从句时,语序变为陈述句,用whether,if连接。
eg: 一般疑问句:Does he study hard?
宾从:I wonder if (whether) he studies hard.
一般疑问句:Will they be back after 3 hours?
宾从:He asked if they would be back after 3 hours.
特殊疑问句变为宾语从句时,语序要变为陈述句语序,保留原句的特殊疑问词,用作引导词。
特殊:What's your name?
宾从:He asked what your name was.
特殊:Where did you go?
The man asked where you went.
2. 现在完成时
① 现在完成时在初中范围主要是两种用法:其一:表示过去发生的动作对现在造成的结果或影响;其二:表示动作发生于过去并持续到现在。
与现在完成时连用的时间状语有:
yet , already , just , recently......
now , today , tonight , ......
since引导的时间状语或时间状语从句。
for构成的表示一段时间的状语。
eg. We have lived in Beijing since I was born .
自从我出生我们就在北京居住了。
He has been away from his hometown for twenty years .
他离开家乡已有二十年了。
-Have you received a letter from your uncle recently ?
-Yes . I got it yesterday afternoon .
你最近收到你叔叔的来信了吗?收到了。我是昨天收到的。
② 一般过去时与现在完成时的用法比较:
一般过去时只单纯表示过去的动作或状态,和现在不发生联系,它可以和确定的表示过去的时间状语连用。而现在完成时表示某一完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果,强调的是现在的情况,因此它不可以和确切的表示过去的时间状语连用。
请比较:
Mr Green has read the book three times .
格林先生已经把这本书读了三遍了。(说明对这本书有印象,有所了解。)
Mr Green read the book yesterday.
格林先生昨天读了这本书。(只说明他昨天看了这本书这一事实,强调看书的动作在昨天发生的。)
③ 有些时间状语如this morning , tonight , this month等,既可用于一般过去时,也可用于现在完成时,但所表达的意义有所不同。用于现在完成时表示包括"现在"在内,而用于一般过去时则与"现在"无关。
They have got the message this March .
他们三月已经得知了这个消息。(讲话时仍然是四月份。)
They got the message this March.
他们三月份得知的这个消息。(讲话时四月份已过)。
They have solved two problems this afternoon.
他们今天下午已经解决了两个问题。(讲话时仍然是下午),
They solved two problems this afternoon.
今天下午他们解决了两个问题。(讲话时下午已过)
三、本阶段日常交际用语小结
Unit 1
--- Excuse me, have you got ...?
--- Yes, I have. ( Sorry, I haven't.)
--- Why don't you ...?
--- Thanks, I will.
--- Thanks a lot. ( Thanks very much.)
--- You are welcome.
--- Have you ever done...?
--- Yes, I have, once. ( No, never.)
--- I've just done...
--- Really?
Unit 2
---What's ...like ?
--- How long have you been...?
--- Since...
--- Have you ever been to...?
--- I've never been there. ( None of us has./ Only ...has. )
--- Have you ever done...?
--- Yes, I have, once. ( No, never.)
--- Would you like to have a try?
--- I don't think I can...
Unit 3
--- How long have you been...?
--- I have been ... for...
--- What have you done since...?
--- How long have you been at this ...?
--- For...
--- How long has she/ he worked there...?
--- She's / He's worked there for... / all her / his life.
Unit 4
--- I'm sorry he isn't here right now.
--- May I help you?
--- That's very kind of you.
--- Yes, that's would be fine/ok.
--- I'll leave a message on his desk.
Unit 5
---Could we go scuba diving?
--- Could you tell us how long we're going to be away?
--- Let's try to find some information about it, OK?
--- Could you please tell me how to search the Internet?
--- Go straight along here.
---Please go to Gate 12.
--- Please come this way.
--- Could you tell me what you think about Hainan Island?
--- That sounds really cool!
四、本阶段词语辨析练习
A. maybe, may be
用maybe或may be填空。
1. _____ he will get the first prize.
2. She _____ the daughter of Mr. White.
3. The meeting will last for three hours _____ .
4. Who _____ your new teacher?
B. borrow, lend, keep, use
中英互译下列句子。
1. 我不想把伞借给他。
2. 这盘录像带你想借多久?
3. 我能用一下你的桌子吗?
4. Jim asked me to lend him my computer.
5. You can use our room.
C. leave, leave for
中英互译下列句子。
1. 他们将于下午五点离开北京。
2. 你的书包拉在图书馆了。
3. She left without saying a word.
4. The bus is leaving for Nanjing.
D. since, for
用since或for填空。
1. He has been disabled ______ he was born.
2. The rain has lasted ______ a whole day.
3. We all admiblack him ______ his will power.
4. You'd better tell her _____ she is wrong.
5. We have begun the experiment _______ 1987.
E. too, also, either, neither
请用too, also, either或neither填空。
1. I agree with you, _____.
2. She doesn't like her mother, _____.
3. _____ he nor we are League Members.
4. He will _____ give you some good suggestions.
5. You can use ______ of the phones, because both of them are broken.
6. Do you like sandwiches, ______?
F. find, look for, find out
请用find, look for或find out填空。
1. It's not easy to _____ a job in this city.
2.She ______ her shoes everywhere, but ______ nothing.
3. I_____ English was one of the most important languages.
4. The poor dog is _____ food in the snow.
5.He thought for a long while, and ______ who told a lie.
G. except, besides
用except或besides填空。
1. All the students passed exam _____ me. I'm very sad.
2. Nobody could find the building _____ her.
3. I have another recorder ______ this one. I like both of them.
4. The workers went to the factory at 8:00 _____ uncle Wang, he is ill today.
H. bad, badly
用bad或badly填空。
1. What a _____ day! I have to stay at home.
2. Mr. Smith didn't go to work because he was ______ ill.
3. They lived in a ______ condition.
4. He ______ behaved in the party.
5. Why did you act so _____ ?
I. die, dead, death. dying
中英互译下列句子。
1. He died in 1879.
2. Let's help the dying bird.
3. She became quiet after her son's death.
4. 你奶奶去世有多久了?
5. 那些玫瑰花快要死了。
6. 没有人听说他的死。
五、练习答案
A.
1. Maybe 2. may be 3. maybe 4. may be
B.
1. I don't want to lend him my umbrella.
2. How long do you want to keep the video tape?
3. Could I use your desk?
4. 吉姆要我把电脑借给他。
5. 你可以用我们的房间。
C.
1. They will leave Beijing at 5:00pm.
2. Your bag is left in the library.
3. 她一言未发地走了。
4. 这趟车即将开往南京。
D.
1. since 2. for 3. for 4. since 5. since
E.
1. too 2. either 3. Neither 4. also 5. neither 6. too
F.
1. find 2. looked for, found 3. found 4. looking for 5. found out
G.
1. except 2. except/ besides 3. besides 4. except
H.
1. bad 2. badly 3. bad 4. badly 5. badly
I.
1. 他死于1879年。
2. 我们帮帮这只快死的鸟吧。
3. 他儿子死后她变得沉默了。
4. How long has your grandma been dead?
5. Those roses are dying.
6. Nobody heard about his death.
初三期中英语模拟试卷
 听力测试(共24分见期中听力)
 书面测试(共96分)
 (选择题 共60分)
 Ⅱ.单项填空 (共15分,每小题1分;满分15分)
 从A、B、C、D四个选项中,选出可以填入空白处的最佳答案。
 ( )1. We went to travel with some friends of____________.
 A. us B. ours C. our D. ourselves
 ( )2. -Where is Tom?
    -He hasn't come to school today. I think he________ be ill.
 A. has to B. should C. may D. need
 ( )3. It takes us________ hour or more to go to my hometown by______ train.
 A. an; a B. a; an C. an; 不填 D. a; 不填
 ( )4. -Look! The bus is coming.
    -But it's full of people. We can't________ it.
 A. get off B. get down C. get on with D. get on
 ( )5. You don't need to look______ every new word in your dictionary while reading.
 A. for B. at C. after D. up
 ( )6. __________cross the road before the traffic light turn green.
 A. Not B. Won't C. Don't D. Doesn't
 ( )7. You must drive_______ next time, or there may be another accident.
 A. more carefully B. carefully C. careful D. more careful
 ( )8. -Can I ________this book?
    -Yes, but you mustn't_______ it to others.
 A. lend; borrow B. borrow; keep C. borrow; lend D. lend; keep
 ( )9. Let's go and have a drink. We've got_______ time before the train leaves.
 A. a little B. few C. little D. a few
 ( )10. Swimming is good for our health, but________ the same time we mustn't forget the  danger.
 A. in B. at C. on D. for
 ( )11. It's________ far_______ walk home from here. Let's take a bus.
 A. so; that B. too; to C. enough; to D. such; that
 ( )12. When we were on holiday, we________ too much money.
 A. spent B. cost C. took D. paid
 ( )13. Excuse me, could you tell me how_______ get to the hospital?
 A. I do B. can I C. do I D. I can
 ( )14. -_________ to the United States?
    -No, never, but I went to Canada a few years ago.
 A. Have you been B. Have you gone
 C. Did you go D. Will you go
 ( )15. Which sign tells us the way out of a building?

 Ⅲ.完形填空(共15小题,每小题1分;满分15分)
 阅读下面短文,掌握其大意,然后从各小题所给的四个选项中,选出一个最佳答案。
Joe wanted a computer. He asked his 1 for the money and they said he must get it himself. But how did he get it? He 2 about this when he walked home. Not many people wanted to ask children to work for them. Maybe he could take away snow for the neighbours(邻居). But this was not 3 . He had to wait a long time for that. He couldn't cut grass for their gardens 4 he had no tools(工具)to do the work with.
Then he saw one of his classmates, Dick, delivering(送) 5 . I could do that, he thought. Maybe I could even get the computer 6 away. I could pay 7 it a little each week. He ran to 8 up with Dick. Joe asked him a lot of questions. He learned that it was 9 to get twenty-five dollars each week. He learned that the job(工作)took 10 three hours each night. Dick 11 him the phone number of the newspaper manager(经理).
Joe almost flew home. After he had told his mother 12 he thought, she 13 . "I think it is a 14 idea, " she said, "I'll call the newspaper...."
"What, Mum," Joe said, "I'll call." After that, I'm going to be a businessman now.
Joe's mother smiled 15 .
( )1. A. teachers B. parents C. classmates D. friends
( )2. A. said B. told C. thought D. spoke
( )3. A. spring B. summer C. autumn D. winter
( )4. A. because B. when C. while D. after
( )5. A. newspapers B. bikes C. computers D. tools
( )6. A now B. right C. just D. only
( )7. A. on B. to C. of D. for
( )8. A. take B. catch C. carry D. get
( )9. A. friendly B. kind C. possible D. wrong
( )10. A. at B. about C. before D. after
( )11. A. taught B. gave C. made D. asked
( )12. A. that B. when C. what D. where
( )13. A. smiled B. shouted C. cried D. worried
( )14. A. big B. large C. great D. bad
( )15. A. sadly B. happily C. politely D. angrily
 Ⅳ. 阅读理解(共15小题,每小题2分;满分30分)
 阅读下列短文,从每小题所给的四个选项中,选出一个最佳答案。
(A)
 The air around us is important to everyone. Without air, we couldn't live. Everyone understands that. But air is important in many other ways-ways that are not always widely known.
 For example, if we didn't have air, there would be no sound. Sound travels through air. Without air, there would be no fire. There would be no cars, cars need air to start. Without air, there would be no wind or clouds. There would be no weather, as we know it. the night time would be very cold and the days very hot. We would have to look for shelter(遮蔽)from the sun, as there would be no atmosphere(大气)to protect(保护)us from the sun's deadly rays(光线).
 ( )1. __________understands we couldn't live without air.
 A. No one B. Someone C. Everyone D. All of us
 ( )2. If we didn't have air, the night time would be very_________.
 A. hot B. short C. cold D. long
 ( )3. Without________, cars can't start.
 A. air B. sound C. wind D. clouds
 ( )4. __________protects us from the sun's deadly rays.
 A. The surface(表面)of the earth B. The cold wind
 C. The atmosphere D. The weather
(B)
 This morning, a boy of twelve saw a small fire at one end of a ship. Tom left home very early, against the wishes of his father, to see the ships at the port. It was a good thing that he did, because there was nobody else around, and the small fire grew dangerously big very soon.
 Tom stood near the ship and shouted at the top of his voice. He woke up the port workers living nearby.
 The ship was one of the six big ships in port at the time and they were all carrying oil(石油)and paper.
 The fire burned hundblacks of boxes of paper, so it spread very quickly. The end of the ship was black with smoke, but thanks to Tom, the fire didn't reach the oil.
 Tom was also lucky, because his father was pleased rather than angry with him.
 ( )5. When Tom saw the fire, he was____________.
 A. at home B. at the port C. on the ship D. on another ship
 ( )6. It was a small fire________.
 A. but it grew big very quickly B. and luckily it stayed small
 C. but it grew big very slowly D. and it was not dangerous
 ( )7. As soon as the boy saw the fire, __________.
 A. he knocked on the doors of nearby houses.
 B. he ran back home to tell his father
 C. he shouted to wake up the workers nearby.
 D. didn't do anything at all.
 ( )8. The ship was carrying____________.
 A. paper and wood B. oil and paper
 C. wood but not oil D. oil but not paper
 ( )9. The fire_________.
 A. burned boxes of paper at first B. burned oil at last
 C. burned the boy D. burned the whole ship
 ( )10. In this story the underlined word "against" means______ in Chinese.
 A. 顺从 B. 按照 C.违背 D. 防备
(C)
 Each morning a rich man found a poor man sitting on a park bench(长凳). The poor man always sat there, looking at the big hotel in which the rich man lived. One day the rich man got out of his car and said to the poor man, "Excuse me, but I just want to know why you sit here and look at my hotel every morning." "Sir," said the poor man, "I am a failure. I have no money, no home. I sleep on this bench, and every night I dream(梦想)that one day I'll sleep in that hotel." The rich man said, "Tonight your dream will come true. I'll pay for the best room in that hotel for you a whole month."
 A few days later, the rich man went by the poor man's room to ask him how he was enjoying himself. To his surprise, he found that the man had moved out of the hotel, back to his park bench. When the rich man asked why, the poor man said, "You see, when I'm down here sleeping on my bench, I dream I'm up there, in that big hotel. It's a wonderful dream. But when I was up there, I dreamed I was back to this cold bench. It was a terrible dream, and I couldn't get any sleep at all."
 ( )11. The poor man lived in _______before he met the rich man.
 A. the hotel B. his home
 C. the park D. the car
 ( )12. Every morning, the poor man sat on the bench and___________.
 A. waited for the rich man B. looked at the rich man's hotel
 C. looked at the rich man's cat D. enjoyed the clean air
 ( )13. Every night the poor man dreamed of__________.
 A. sleeping in that hotel B. becoming rich
 C. owning that hotel D. being the rich man's friend
 ( )14. The poor man moved out of the hotel because__________.
 A. he didn't want to live in such a fine room
 B. he didn't like the rich man
 C. he couldn't pay for the room
 D. he couldn't get any sleep at all there
 ( )15. In the end, the poor man found it________ to sleep in the hotel.
 A. sorry B. nice C. wonderful D. terrible
 (非选择题 共36分)
 Ⅴ.完成句子(共10小题,每小题1分;满分10分)
 A) 根据所给首字母提示,在右侧方框中的横线上写出符合句意的单词。
 1. J________ the first is New Year's Day.
 2. -May I borrow your bike?
   -C________!
 3. The old man can n______ read nor write.
 4. We should brush our t______ before going to bed.
 5. Summer is the h______ season of the year.
 B)用括号中所给动词的正确形式填空。
 6. It's five o'clock. The students_________ (play) football on the playground.
 7. You _________(not pass) the exam if you don't work hard enough.
 8. The baby is sleeping. Could you please stop________(make) so much noise?
 9. This machine________ (use) for cleaning the house.
 10. The man spoke very slowly. He wanted me_________ (understand) what he said.
 Ⅵ. 补全对话(共10小题,每小题1分;满分10分)
 在下面对话的空白处填入适当的单词,使对话意思完整、通顺。每空填写一词。
 Doctor: What's 1 with you, young man?
 Paul: I don't feel 2 .
 Doctor: I'm 3 to hear that. Please take 4 your shirt and 5 down on the bed.
 Paul: Yes, doctor.
 Doctor: Well, there's 6 much wrong with you. Do you take much exercise?
 Paul: No, doctor. I never have 7 time for exercise.
 Doctor: How do you sleep?
 Paul: Very badly, doctor. Can you give me 8 medicine to help me sleep?
 Doctor: Yes, I can, but I'm not going to. You don't need medicine. Just take more exercise.
 Paul: You're right, doctor. It's important for me to 9 healthy. Thank you for your advice.
 Doctor: You're welcome. I 10 you will be better soon.
 Ⅶ. 书面表达(本题分A、B两部分,共计15分)
 A)阅读下面短文,在空白处填入适当的单词,使短文结构完整,意思通顺、连贯。每空填写一词。(每小题1分,共5分)
I go to the cinema a lot. I often go alone, 1 sometimes my friend Rose comes, too. My husband 2 comes with me-he is always too busy! I buy chocolates to 3 during the film. I usually 4 these night films very much. I don't want to see the 5 film twice, but sometimes I do if it's really good.
 B) 根据中文意思和英文提示词语,写出意思连贯,符合逻辑的英文文段。所给英文提示词语必须都用上,中文提示内容不必逐句翻译,每组英文提示所写出的句数不限。(共11分)
 澳大利亚学生Sam最近又来到北京,去了王府井,发现这里发生了巨大的变化,请你以Sam的身份给父母写一张明信片,介绍......
 1. happy, visit, again
 2. change, take place
 3. go, Wang Fu Jing Street, morning, building, shop, market
 4. flower, poster(宣传画), put, for, the Olympics
参考答案
 听力测试(共24分见在线听力)
 书面测试(共96分)
 Ⅱ.单项填空(共15小题,每小题1分;满分15分)
 1-5. B C C D D 6-10 C A C A B 11-15 B A D A C
 Ⅲ. 完形填空(共15小题,每小题1分;满分15分)
 1-5. B C D A A 6-10 B D B C B 11-15 B C A C B
 Ⅳ.阅读理解(共15小题,每小题2分;满分30分)
 1-4. C C A C 5-10 B A C B A C 11-15 C B A D D
 Ⅴ. 完成句子(共10小题,每小题1分;满分10分)
 1. January 2. Certainly 3. neither 4. teeth 5. hottest
 6. are playing 7. won't pass 8. making 9. is used 10. to understand
 Ⅵ.补全对话
 1. wrong 2. well 3. sorry 4. off 5. lie/sit 6. nothing
 7. enough/much/any 8. some 9. keep/be 10. hope
 Ⅶ.书面表达
 A) 1. but 2. never 3. eat 4. enjoy/like/love 5. same
 B)本题满分为11分。
 第一档(11-9分)符合题目要求,整篇表达清楚,语言无误。
 第二档(9-8分)符合题目要求,整篇表达清楚,语言有少量错误。
 第三档(8-7分)基本符合题目要求,整篇表达基本清楚,语言有部分错误。
 第四档(6-5分)基本符合题目要求,整篇表达基本清楚,语言有较多错误。
 第五档(4-3分)部分内容基本符合题目要求,整篇表达欠完整,但尚能达意,语言有较多错误。
 第六档(2-0分)整篇表达不清楚,只照抄或拼凑提示词语。
 (注意明信片格式,应有开头的称谓和结尾的落款,如果没有,应扣掉1分。)
参考答案:
 Dear Mum and Dad,
 I'm very happy to visit Beijing again. Great changes have taken place in Beijing(here). Today I went to Wang Fu Jing Street early in the morning and I had a good time. Now, there are a lot of now buildings, modern shops and large markets in there. Many beautiful flowers and posters are put there(in the street). People in Beijing(here)are working hard for the 2008 Olympics. I hope they'll have good luck.
yours,
Sam

中考复习系列一 词汇
一、中考对词汇的考查主要集中在以下几个方面:
 1、能正确拼写大纲词汇表中的常用单词;
 2、掌握大纲词汇表中所列全部单词的词文,并了解其词类(词性);
 3、了解构词法的基本知识,并根据此知识判断常用词的合成词与派生词的词义和词类,例如:drive -
driver, use - useful;
 4、正确理解现行教材课文中出现过的短语与习语;正确使用及辨析其中比较常见的短语和习语;
 5、理解词类转化,例如:water (n.) - water (v.)
二、词汇考查点分项说明:
1、掌握大纲词汇表,了解词类
 1)大纲词汇表中所列的词汇基本上为1至6册课本中所列的四会单词(即书后单词表中不带任何符号的单
词)。要求同学们把所列单词的词义完全掌握。在此基础上,了解其词类(词性)。尤其注意要在情景中运
用该词,而不是孤立地去记忆某个单词。
 2) 针对大纲词汇表中的常用单词,一定要能做到正确拼写。该项知识常以单词拼写的形式来考查学生,
但一般无难题,基本属于送分题。出题范围主要是大纲中的一、二级词汇,也有可能出现非大纲词汇,但一
般为常用词汇,尽管不在大纲中出现,却通常在课文中出现过。
请看以下几道例题:
1. Shanghai is a large c t  in China.
2. Adam often helps me a lot. He is my best f    nd.
3. I can't carry the box. It's too h v .
4. The man is very poor. He had no m n to buy food.
5. ---How often do you play football?
--- Tw a week.
6. My grandparents like growing flowers. They w t the flowers everyday.
7. Summer is the hottest s son in the year.
8. --- Can you sp the word?
  --- Yes. T-A-B-L-E, table.
9. He was so excited that he couldn't f l asleep last night.
10. Everyone had a good time at the party. It was a p_ _ _ s _ _ _ evening.
( Key 1. city 2. friend  3. heavy 4. money  5. twice  6. water 7. season  8.
spell  9. fall 10. pleasant )
3) 了解英文的词类:
  英语中的单词根据词义、句法作用和形式特征所作的分类。共有十类:名词、代词、数词、冠词、形容
词、副词、动词、介词、连词、感叹词。
词类 英语名称(简称) 意 义 例 词 名词 Nouns (n.) 表示人、事物时间、地点或抽象概念的名称 John
room 冠词 Articles (art.) 用于名词之前,帮助说明名词的含义 a an
the 数词 Numerals (num.) 表示数量或顺序 nine
first 代词 Pronouns (pron.) 代替名词、数词以避免重复 them
everything 形容词 Adjectives (adj.) 表示人或事物的属性或特征 good
interesting 副词 Adverbs (adv.) 修饰动词、形容词、其它副词或全句,表示行为特征或性状特征 almost
bravely 动词 Verbs (v.) 表示动作、状态或性质 stand
be 介词 Prepositions (prep.) 用于名词或代词之前,表示名词、代词与其它词之间的关系 near
from 连词 Conjunction (conj.) 连接单词、短语、从句或句子 and
but 感叹词 Interjection(interj.) 表示说话时的语气或感情 hello
oh   在上述的十大词类中,名词、代词、形容词、副词、数词、动词等具有明确的意义,可以在句中独立充
当句子成分,称为实义词。介词、连词和冠词只能起联系或辅助的作用,都不在句子中担任任何成分,称为
虚词。感叹词一般不构成句子的一部分,通常作独立成分。
2、了解构词法的基本知识
 在英语中,一个单词往往与其它词在结构上有联系,把这些联系的规律总结出来就是构词法。构词的方
法主要有派生、转化和合成等三种。
1) 派生法
在一个单词前或词尾加上一个词缀,从而变成一个新词的方法叫做派生法。加在单词前的词缀叫前缀,
加在单词后的词缀叫后缀。
1.常用前缀
前缀 意义 例词 un- 不 unknown未知的
unhappy不高兴的 dis- 不,否定 dislike不喜欢 discover发现 re- 再,重复 retell复述 mid- 中 mid-night半夜 mid-term期中 mis- 误会 misunderstand误会 bi- 双 bicycle自行车 il- 不,非 illegal非法的 in- 不,非 informal非正式的 im- 不,非 impossible不可能的 ir- 不,非 irregular不规则的 inter- 间,相互 international国际的 tele- 远 telephone电话 2.常用后缀
后缀 意义 例词 -er 动作者,人 teacher教师 -or 动作者,人 visitor参观 -ian 人 musician音乐家 -ess 女性 actress女演员 -ese 人,语言 Chinese中国人,汉语 -ese (地方、人)的 Japanese日本(人)的 -hood 身份、状态 childhood童年 -ity (抽象名词) ability能力 -th 过程,结果 death死亡 -ness 状态、性质 happiness快乐 -ship 状态、身份 friendship友谊 -tion 动作、状态 action行为 -ure 动作、结果 pleasure快乐 -an (地方、人)的 Canadian加拿大人(的) -ed 有,像 talented有才华的 -en ...的 wooden木制的 -ern (表示方向) southern南方的 -ful 充满 meaningful有意义的 -less 不、无 useless没用的 -ly ...地 carefully细心地 -en 使...变得 weaken削弱、(使)变弱 -fy 使...化 satisfy(使)满意 -ize,-ise 使...化 modernize(使)现代化 -teen 十几 thirteen十三 -ty 几十 thirty三十 -th 第... ninth第九 (二)转化法
  转化法是指基本不改变单词的词形,而将其转用为另一词类词。单词转化后的意义常与转化前的意义有
密切的联系。
May I have a look ? 我可以看一看吗?(动词转化为名词)
Let him have a try. 让他试试。(动词转化为名词)
  Can we book the tickets ahead? 我们能提前定票吗?(名词转化为动词)
The hall can seat thousands of people. 大厅能坐数千人。(名词转化为动词)
She had to busy herself with housework. 她不得不忙于家务活。(形容词转化成动词)
You'd better empty the bottle first. 你最好把瓶子先倒空。(名词转化为动词)
  It's necessary to know the difference between right and wrong.
有必要知道对错之间的区别。(形容词转化成名词)
They often help the poor.
他们经常帮助穷人。(形容词转化成名词)
We began to drive north.
我们开始向北行驶。 (名词转化成副词)
There were lots of ups and downs in his life.
他的一生中有许多的起起落落。 (副词转化成名词)
(三)合成法
把两个或两个以上的单词合成为一个单词,这种构词法成为合成法。
1.合成形容词
He is a white-collar clerk. 他是一名白领职员。
He is an open-minded leader. 他是一名思想开明的领导。
What a kind-hearted girl! 多幺好心的女孩!
This is a good-looking a table. 这是一张好看的桌子。
Taking a taxi is time-saving. 乘坐出租车很省时。
He has heard the heart-breaking news. 他已经听说了这个令人心碎的消息。
It's dangerous to walk on this ice-covered road.
行走在这条被冰覆盖的路上是很危险的。
How much is the hand-made model? 那个手工制作的模型多少钱?
Chinese people are hard-working. 中国人民是勤劳的。
2.合成名词
This is our classroom. 这是我们的教室。
Do you often play basketball? 你经常打篮球吗?
Her handwriting is much better than mine. 她的书法比我的要好得多。
The waiting-room is quite crowded. 候车室里相当拥挤。
The water in the swimming-pool is clear, like a blue mirror.
游泳池里的水很清澈,像一面镜子。
Please look at the blackboard. 请看黑板。
He plants lots of flowers in his green-house. 他在温室里种了许多花。
They are playing games on the playground. 他们在操场上做游戏。
The get-together will begin at 8:00 pm. 联欢会将于晚上八点开始。
He is my brother-in-law. 他是我的姐夫。
I'm not a good-for-nothing. 我并不是一个无用之人。
The plant is called forget-me-not. 这种植物叫含羞草。
3.合成动词
Please air-dry the paper. 请将纸风干。
He is undergoing great suffering. 他正在遭受巨大的痛楚.。
It's hard to white-wash the huge wall. 粉刷这面大墙是很难的。
The man was blacklisted. 这个人被列入了黑名单。
4.合成副词
She lives downstairs. 她住在楼下。
If you look eastwards, you can see the sea. 如果你往东看,能够看到大海。
3、正确理解现行教材课文中出现过的短语与习语;正确使用及辨析其中比较常见的短语和习语;
 1)初中阶段比较常见的短语:
 同学们应该根据自己手头的现行教材,将1至6册中出现过的常见短语进行归纳总结,对于其中比较容易混
淆的短语要弄清楚它们之间的区别。
 2)初中阶段比较常见的习语有:
 1. too... to
 2. so.. that...
 3. It's time for sb. to do sth.
 4. both.... and..
 5. either...or...
 6. neither... nor...
 7. not... until...
 8. not only... but also...
 9. as... as...
 10. not as (so)... as...
 11. It takes sb. some time to do sth.
 12. It's good (bad) for...
 13. as soon as
 14. used to do
 15. some... others...
 16. be angry with...
 17. be different from
 18. one... the other...
 19. take sb. to a place
 20. Thank you for doing sth.
 21. get ready to do sth.
 22. ...one of...
 23. get on well with ...
 24. sb. spend... on...
 25. buy... for...
 26. be interested in...
 27. You'd better...
 28. ask sb. (not) to do sth.
 29. enjoy doing
 30. be good at...
4、理解词类转化
  在英语中,不少词可以属于几个词类,如water( 水、浇水;名词和动词);work(工作;动词和名词)
,fast(快;形容词和副词),since(自从;介词和连词)等。
三、巩固练习
① 根据句意补全单词中所缺字母,使补全后的句子通顺、合理。
l. What colour is Ann's skirt? It's r____d.
2.We often play g____mes after school.
3.Put your r____ler and your pen in the pencil-box.
4.My parents work f____ ve days a week.
5.There are a lot of cars and buses in the str____t.
6.Don't open the wind ____ . It's cold outside.
7.How do you usually go to school? By b__ k __.

8.There are a lot of flowers in the g __ d ___.

9.Winter comes after a ___ n.

10. Trees turn gr___n in spring.
11. L__sson One is easy.
12. Can you make a c__ke?
13. This box is small. Give me a b__g one.
14. A d__g is running after a cat.
15. We cl___n the classroom every day.
② 根据句子意思完成单词,单词的第一个字母已给出
1.If you are ill , you must go to h_______ .
2.We all know Beijing is the c_______ of China .
3.D________ ,25th is Christmas Day .
4.We can see s________ at night when it's fine .
5.You can come here b_______ 8:00 and 9:00 tomorrow .
6.I hope you have a good time on you j______ .
7.Could you tell me w_______ the nearest post office is ?
③ 根据句意用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空

1.There are two ________in the basket. (egg)

2.This is my pencil. That one is ________. (your)

3.Who is _______, Tom, Mike or Jack ? (tall)

4.We live on the ______ floor. (twenty)
5. I can see three _______ on the desk. (pen)
6. This room is _______. It isn't yours. (our)
7. "Can I borrow your ruler?" "Certainly. Here _______ are." (your)
8. Lin Lin is the ______ in our class. (young)
9. We live on the _______ floor. (seven)
10. Li Lei is _______ than Lin Tao. (old)
11. The Changjiang River is the _______ river in China. (long)
12.Wei Hua gave me two______ yesterday.(book)
13.That pen isn't yours. It's ______ .(her)
14.The ______ lesson is very easy.(six)
15.John is ______ than Sam.(tall)
16.Can you help ______ with my English? (I)
④ 根据汉语提示完成句子
1、我用了两个小时修车。
It _______ me two hours _______ _______ the bike.
2、直到妈妈回来时,他才完成作业。
He ______ finish his homework _______ his mother came back.
3、他和我都不是老师。
______ he _______ I am a teacher.
4、他从小就对数学感兴趣。
He became ________ in maths when he was ________.
5、你最好乘火车。
You'd _______ ______ a train.
6、是时候上车了。
It's time to ______ ______ the bus.
7、珠江是中国的第三最长的河流。
Zhujiang river is _______ _________ __________ __________ in China .
三、巩固练习参考答案
① 根据句意补全单词中所缺字母,使补全后的句子通顺、合理。
1. red 2. games 3. ruler 4. five 5. street 6. window 7. bike 8. garden 9. autumn
10. green 11. Lesson 12. cake 13. big 14. dog 15. clean
② 根据句子意思完成单词,单词的第一个字母已给出
1. hospital 2. capital 3. December 4. stars 5. between 6. journey 7. where
③ 根据句意用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空
1. eggs 2. yours 3. the tallest 4. twentieth 5. pens 6. ours 7. you 8. yourself 9.
seventh 10. older 11. longest 12. books 13. hers 14. sixth 15. taller 16. me
④ 根据汉语提示完成句子
1. took, to mend/ repair/ fix
2. didn't, until
3. Neither, nor
4. interested, young
5. better take
6. get on
7. the third longest


??

??

??

??



http://cooco.net.cn 永久免费组卷搜题网



http://cooco.net.cn 永久免费组卷搜题网